Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Pianos digitales
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para
EN
DIGITAL KEYBOARDDIGITAL KEYBOARD
Owner’s ManualOwner’s Manual
2
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E353
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting
cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended!
If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’
cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the
larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, con-
sult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long
periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-
able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer
assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and
any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE
using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are
not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-
ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-
ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,
contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and
never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-
rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-
teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-
son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
For PSR-E353
3
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifica-
tions not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your author-
ity, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class
"B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements pro-
vides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in harmful
interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gen-
erates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product
is found to be the source of interference, which can be deter-
mined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected
by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker
or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change
the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute
this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate
retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Elec-
tronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park,
CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib-
uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
For AC adaptor and PSR-E353
4
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and main-
tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-
ature accompanying the product.
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-
pod, bracket, or table specified by
the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-
vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-
aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
(UL60065_03)
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
For AC adaptor
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
(can_b_01)
5
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals
In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.
MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do.
Computer-related Operations
Contains instructions about computer-related functions.
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.
To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E353” (for example) to the Model
Name box, then click [SEARCH].
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing
the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge.
Yamaha Online Member
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this
manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.
Included Accessories
• Owner’s Manual (this book)
• AC adaptor
*1
• Music rest
• Online Member Product Registration
*2
*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer.
*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Formats and functions
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the
MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-
compatible music data can be accurately
played by any GM-compatible tone generator,
regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is
affixed to all software and hardware products
that support GM System Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified
version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone
generation format. Naturally, you can play
back any XG song data using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some
songs may play back differently compared to
the original data, due to the reduced set of
control parameters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal
Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for con-
necting a computer with peripheral
devices. It allows “hot swapping” (con-
necting peripheral devices while the
power to the computer is on).
Style File Format (SFF)
The Style File Format combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-
how into a single unified format.
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch
Response feature gives you maximum
expressive control over the level of the
Voices.
6
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals................................................ 5
Included Accessories............................................ 5
Formats and functions .......................................... 5
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals 10
Setting Up 12
Power Requirements .......................................... 12
Using the music rest ........................................... 13
Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or
External Audio Equipment ............................. 13
Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack
.. 13
Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13
Auto Power Off Function .................................... 14
Setting the Volume ............................................. 14
Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14
Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard
.14
Display Items and Basic Operations 15
Display Items ...................................................... 15
Basic Operations ................................................ 15
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16
Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16
Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16
Using the Metronome ......................................... 16
Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17
Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17
Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound
(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 18
Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 18
Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19
Playing the keyboard with two persons
(Duo mode) 21
Playing Styles 22
Using the Music Database.................................. 23
Registering a Style File....................................... 23
Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24
Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24
Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 26
Playing Songs 27
Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27
Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27
BGM Playback.................................................... 28
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 28
Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28
A-B Repeat......................................................... 29
Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29
Playing an External Audio Device with the
Built-in Speakers 30
Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody
Suppressor function) ......................................30
Using the Song Lesson Feature 31
Downloading the Song Book...............................31
Keys To Success ................................................31
Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................33
Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting
..34
Phrase Repeat ....................................................34
Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the
Chords (Chord Study) 35
Hear and experience a sound of a single chord..35
Hear and experience basic chord progressions..35
Playing Chords Along With Chord
Progressions of a Song
36
Play the chords in combination with “Waiting”
of the Lesson function .................................... 36
Recording Your Performance 37
Track Structure of a Song ................................... 37
Quick Recording..................................................37
Recording to a Specified Track ........................... 38
Clearing a User Song.......................................... 38
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 39
Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration
Memory ..........................................................39
Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration
Memory ..........................................................39
The Functions 40
Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 43
Connecting to a computer ...................................43
Connecting an iPhone/iPad.................................43
Backup and Initialization 43
Backup Parameters.............................................43
Initialization .........................................................43
Appendix
Troubleshooting.............................................44
Song Book Sample ........................................ 46
Voice List ........................................................ 56
Drum Kit List ..................................................61
Song List......................................................... 64
Style List ......................................................... 65
Music Database List ......................................66
Effect Type List ..............................................67
Specifications................................................. 69
Index................................................................ 70
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the
advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Contents
7
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
For AC adaptor
WARNING
• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic
instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.
• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.
CAUTION
• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible.
If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the
power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor
from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet,
keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if
the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the
instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord
from the wall AC outlet.
For PSR-E353
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or
even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These
precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the
cord, or place heavy objects on it.
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor
can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open
the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal
components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp
or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,
bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any
openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,
turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the
AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha
service personnel.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Power supply/AC adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
DMI-5 1/3
The model number, serial number, power require-
ments, etc., may be found on or near the name plate,
which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this
serial number in the space provided below and retain
this manual as a permanent record of your purchase
to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
(bottom_en_01)
8
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning
item may fall over and cause a fire.
• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in
explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.
- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.
- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be
charged.
- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as
necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.
- Use the specified battery type (page 69) only.
- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,
and made by the same manufacturer.
- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the
+/- polarity markings.
- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used
for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.
- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came
with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when
charging.
• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally
swallow them.
• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the
battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or
skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery
fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical
burns.
• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If
you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.)
Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to
you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but
are not limited to, the following:
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a
multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or
possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord
can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not
to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might
accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to
prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip
over them.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are
using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,
immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug
from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,
electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.
When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to
unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage
to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,
turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on
or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum
levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the
instrument to set the desired listening level.
Fire warning
Battery
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC adaptor
Location
Connections
DMI-5 2/3
9
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps
on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you
or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or
operational failure.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the
instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,
switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period
of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can
cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss
or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage
to the product, damage to data, or damage to
other property, follow the notices below.
Handling
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,
stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.
Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
When you use the instrument along with an application on
your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you
set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to
avoid noise caused by communication.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or
vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct
sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to
the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified
operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the
instrument, since this might discolor the panel or
keyboard.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
• Some of the data of this instrument (page 43) are retained
when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may
be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save
your important data onto an external device such as a
computer (page 43).
Information
About copyrights
• Copying of the commercially available musical data
including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which
Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha
has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright
laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to
distribute media in which these contents are saved or
recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to
those in the product.
* The contents described above include a computer
program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE
data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.
* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your
performance or music production using these contents is
recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is
not required in such cases.
About functions/data bundled with the
instrument
• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or
arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the
original.
About this manual
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual
are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this manual are
the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
Handling caution
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
DMI-5 3/3
11
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
q [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................... page 13
w [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 13
e [DEMO] button......................................page 28
r [FUNCTION] button..............................page 40
t [METRONOME] button.........................page 16
y [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 24
u PART
[L] button ..............................................page 33
[R] button..............................................page 33
u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37
[REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37
i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 31
o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 34
!0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button
...............................................................page 33
!1 [A-B REPEAT] button...........................page 29
!2 [REW] button ........................................page 28
!3 [FF] button ............................................page 28
!4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28
!1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 22
!2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 24
!3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 24
!4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22
!5 [START/STOP] button .................. pages 22, 27
!6 [REC] button.........................................page 37
!7 [SONG] button ......................................page 27
!8 [VOICE] button .....................................page 16
!9 [STYLE] button.....................................page 22
@0 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ........... page 15
@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............page 16
@2
[ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button .
.........page 18
@3 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 30
@4 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 39
@5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23
@6 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17
@7 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17
@8 [HARMONY] button..............................page 19
@9 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit.... page 16
Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument
assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.”
In the Lesson mode
In the Recording mode
In the Song mode
In the Style mode
#0
#3 #4
#1 #2
Rear Panel
#0 [SUSTAIN] jack..................................... page 13
#1 [USB TO HOST] terminal*.................... page 43
#2 [AUX IN] jack ........................................ page 30
#3 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack ..................... page 13
#4 DC IN jack............................................. page 12
* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-
related Operations” (page 5) on the website. When connecting,
use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables
cannot be used.
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Buttons having this indication can be used to call
up an alternate function when the relevant button
is pressed and held. Hold down this button until
the function is called up.
12
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Power Requirements
Although the instrument will run either from an AC
adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an
AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is
more environmentally friendly than batteries and
does not deplete resources.
Using an AC adaptor
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off
(the backlight display is off).
2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power
supply jack).
3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/
Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-
metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batter-
ies). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH
batteries are recommended for this instrument, since
other types may result in poorer battery performance.
Installing the batteries
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.
2 Open the battery compartment cover located on
the instrument’s bottom panel.
3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow
the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-
ment.
4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that
it locks firmly in place.
When battery power becomes too low for proper
operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound
may be distorted, and other problems may occur.
When this happens, make sure to replace all batter-
ies with new ones or already-recharged ones.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the
wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument
or overheating.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC
outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trou-
ble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse
order to disconnect the AC adaptor.
• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an
AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the
instrument.
WARNING
CAUTION
AC outlet
AC
adaptor
3
2
DC IN jack
(page 11)
NOTE
• Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with bat-
teries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of
data being recorded or transferred at the time.
• Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind
of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 42).
• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the
specified charger device when charging.
• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an
AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the
instrument.
NOTICE
NOTE
13
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting the battery type
After installing new batteries and turning the power
on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately
(rechargeable or not) via Function number 046 (page
42).
Using the music rest
Connecting Headphones (sold
separately) or External Audio
Equipment
A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone
plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitor-
ing. The speakers are automatically shut off when a
plug is inserted into this jack.
The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an
external output. You can connect the [PHONES/
OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier,
stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level
audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to
that device.
Connecting a Footswitch to the
[SUSTAIN] jack
You can produce a natural sustain as you play by
pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately)
plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.
Turning the Power On/Off
1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.”
2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the
power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the
[MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power,
press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a
second.
• Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of
the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long
period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level,
since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-
ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-
sician.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-
ponents, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn
off the power for all components.
NOTICE
Insert the music rest
into the slots as shown.
1/4” stereo
phone plug
CAUTION
• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external
device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to
the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the
power off.
• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to
the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.
• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing
this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-
ing in reversed footswitch operation.
• The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and
style (automatic accompaniment; page 22).
• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a
small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the
instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a
long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the
wall AC outlet.
NOTICE
NOTE
CAUTION
14
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Auto Power Off Function
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this
instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is
not operated for a specified period of time. The
amount of time that will elapse before the power is
automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.
To set the time that elapses before Auto
Power Off is executed:
Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until
“AutoOff” (Function 045; page 42) appears, then use
the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value.
Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes)
Default value: 30 (minutes)
To disable the Auto Power Off function:
Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)
switch to turn on the power while holding down the
lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be
disabled by selecting Off in Function number 045
(page 42).
Setting the Volume
When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME]
dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard
sound.
Selecting an EQ Setting for the
Best Sound
Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you
the best possible sound when listening through differ-
ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal
speakers, headphones, or an external speaker sys-
tem.
1
Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO]
button for longer than a second to call
up “024 MasterEQ” (Function 024; page
41).
“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select the
desired Master EQ type.
Master EQ types
Changing the Touch Response of
the Keyboard
You can specify the Touch Response (how the sound
responds to your playing strength). This can be set
via Function number 007 (page 40).
• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the
power is turned off. For details, see page 43.
• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not
turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified
period of time. Always turn off the power manually when
the instrument is not in use.
• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period
of time while connected to an external device such as an
amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the
instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to
the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-
tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the
power to turn off automatically when a device is con-
nected, disable Auto Power Off.
• Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long
period of time, or your hearing may be damaged.
NOTE
NOTICE
CAUTION
1 Speaker
Optimum for listening via the instru-
ment’s built-in speakers.
2 Headphone
Optimum for headphones, or for listen-
ing via external speakers.
3 Boost Features more powerful sound.
4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.
5Bright
Lowers the mid range for a brighter
sound.
6 Mild
Lowers the high range for a softer
sound.
024
024
MasterEQ
Speaker
1
Current Master
EQ type
Hold for longer
than a second.
15
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Display Items and Basic Operations
Display Items
Basic Operations
Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are
used to select items and change values.
Number buttons
Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or
value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,
the first zeroes can be omitted.
[-] and [+] buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or
press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.
Press and hold either button to continuously increase or
decrease the value in the corresponding direction.
GrandPno
001
003
These indicate the operating condition
of the instrument.
Song/Voice/Style
Normally this indicates the notes you
play. When the Song Lesson function
is used, this indicates the current
notes and chord of playback. When
the Dictionary function (page 26) is
used, this indicates the notes of the
chord you specify.
Notation
• Any notes occurring below or above
the staff are indicated by “8va.”
• For a few specific chords, not all notes
may be shown, due to space limita-
tions in the display.
NOTE
This area indicates the Lesson
related status is on.
Keys To Success
(page 31)
Phrase Repeat (page
34)
Chord Progression
(page 36)
Indicates the Passing
Status (page 32) of
the Keys To Success
lesson.
Lesson Indication
Each indication is shown when the
corresponding function is turned on.
...
Touch Response
(page 14)
...
Ultra-Wide Stereo
(page 18)
...
Auto Accompani-
ment (page 22)
... Split (page
17
)
... Dual (page
17
)
... Harmony (page
19
)
... Arpeggio (page
19
)
... Duo (page
21
)
On/Off status
Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto
Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or
specified via Song playback.
Normally indicates the current measure number
of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION]
button (page 40) is in use, this indicates the
Function number.
Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and
chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use.
Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or
when using the Dictionary function.
Chord
Measure or Function
Keyboard Display
003
02
7
Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or
target Track of Song recording (page 29, 38).
Lit: Track contains data
Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data
Flashing: Track is selected as recording track
Indicates the current beat of playback.
Song Track status
Beat
Press number buttons
[0], [0], [3], or simply
press [3].
Example: Selecting Voice 003,
Harpsichord.
Press briefly to
increase.
Press briefly to
decrease.
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
16
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-
ment has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,
drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical
sounds.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The Voice number and name will be shown.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select the desired Voice.
Refer to the Voice List on page 56.
3
Play the keyboard.
Preset Voice Types
When you want to reset various settings to default
and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTA-
BLE GRAND] button.
The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be
selected as the Main Voice.
The instrument features a built-in metronome (a
device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for
practicing.
1
Press the [METRONOME] button to start
the metronome.
2
Press the [METRONOME] button again
to stop the metronome.
To change the tempo:
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to
instantly reset the value to the default tempo.
To set the Time Signature:
Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up
“TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 42), then use the
Number buttons.
To set the Metronome Volume:
This can be set via Function number 038 (page 42).
Selecting a Main Voice
001–196 Instrument Voices (including sound effects).
197–214
(Drum Kit)
Various drum and percussion sounds are
assigned to individual keys, from which they
can be played. Details on the instruments and
key assignments of each Drum Kit can be
found in the Drum Kit List on page 61.
215–234
Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by
simply playing the keyboard (page 19).
235–573 XGlite Voices (page 58)
000
One Touch Setting
The One Touch Setting feature automatically
selects the most suitable Voice when you
select a Style or Song (excepting the Song
inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select
Voice number “000” to activate this feature.
GrandPno
001
Voice name
The Voice shown here
becomes the Main Voice
for the instrument.
Voice number
Appears after the
[VOICE] button is
pressed.
Flute
096
Select 096 Flute
Playing the “Grand Piano”
Using the Metronome
Tempo
090
Current Tempo value
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
17
In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different
Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”
1
Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.
2
Press the [DUAL] button again to exit
from Dual.
To select a different Dual Voice:
Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suit-
able for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a
different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual]
button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 41),
then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,
you can play a different Voice between the Left hand
and Right hand areas.
1
Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.
The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and
Right hand areas.
You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area
of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and
Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-
board.
The highest key for the Left hand area is referred
to as the “Split Point” (Function 006;
page 40
)
which can be changed from the default F#2 key.
2
Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit
from Split.
To select a different Split Voice:
Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice”
(Function 016;
page 41
), then use the number buttons
[0]–[9], [+], [-].
Layering a Dual Voice
GrandPno
001
Appears when Dual
Voice is on
Two Voices will
sound at the
same time.
Playing a Split Voice in the Left
Hand area
GrandPno
001
Appears when Split
Voice is on
Split Voice
Main Voice and
Dual Voice
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
18
You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider
sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing
the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the
Ultra-Wide Stereo effect.
1
Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-
ton to turn it on.
The sound will expand around you—as if the
speaker position is outside of the instrument.
2
Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-
ton again to turn it off.
To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type:
Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button
to call up “Wide” (Function 025;
page 41
), then use
the Number buttons.
This instrument can apply various Effects as listed
below to the instrument’s sound.
Reverb
Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the
sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called
up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another
one via Function number 020 (
page 41
). You can also
set the Reverb depth via Function number 021 (
page
41
).
Chorus
Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more
spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is
called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select
another one via Function number 022 (
page 41
).
Panel Sustain
By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function
number 023 (
page 41
), you can add a fixed, auto-
matic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can
also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold
separately; page 13).
Playing with enhanced, more spa-
cious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)
GrandPno
001
Appears when Ultra-
Wide Stereo is on.
Applying Effects to the Sound
• Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to
which sustain is not applied.
NOTE
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
19
You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main
Voice.
By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply har-
mony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or
echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or
the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is
selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automati-
cally played back when you simply play the appropri-
ate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could
play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—
and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a
variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be
used creatively in music production as well as perfor-
mance.
1
Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-
ton to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio
function.
When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on,
the most suitable one will be selected for the cur-
rent Main Voice.
If you want to select a specific type, select it by
the operation steps 2 and 3 below.
2
Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO]
button for longer than a second so that
“Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 41)
appears on the display.
After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the
current type appears.
3
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select the desired type.
When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer
to the Harmony Type list on page 67; to specify
an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list
on page 67.
4
Press a note or notes on the keyboard to
trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio.
When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony
part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for
example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the
played sound of the Main Voice.
Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeg-
gios (broken chords) are automatically played
back when you simply play the appropriate notes
on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase
differs depending on the number of pressed notes
and the area of the keyboard.
5
To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off,
press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-
ton again.
Adding Harmony or Arpeggio
• The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main
Voice.
• When selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234,
the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on.
• When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005,
the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand
melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press
chords in the auto accompaniment range of the key-
board.
GrandPno
001
Analogon
106
Appears when the Har-
mony is turned on.
Appears when the
Arpeggio is turned on.
or
NOTE
• When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176,
select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main
Voice.
143–173: Select a drum Voice.
174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc” (Voice
No.207).
175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.208) or
“Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.209).
176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.210).
Duet
001
028
Harm/Arp
028
Current type
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTE
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
20
To adjust the Harmony Volume:
This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (
page
41
).
To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity:
This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (
page
41
).
Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the
Footswitch (Hold)
You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback
continues even after the note has been released, by
pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN]
jack.
1
Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of
times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031)
item appears on the display.
After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the
current setting is shown.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select “Arp Hold.”
If you want to restore the footswitch function to
sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both
hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.”
3
Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio
playback using the footswitch.
Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then
press the footswitch. Even if you release the
notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop
Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.
How the effect is applied to the sound for
the various Types
• Harmony Type 001 to 005
Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the
auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when
Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22).
• Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill)
Hold down two keys.
• Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo)
Keep holding
down the keys.
• Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo)
Play the keys.
• Arpeggio Type 027 to 176
Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice
and the Dual Voice.
Arpeggio function applies only to the split
Voice.
When Split is off:
When Split is on:
• Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/
Dual Voices simultaneously.
• Selecting a Voice number between 225 and 234 as
the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split auto-
matically.
NOTE
Pdl Func
Sustain
1
031
031
Arp Hold
2
031
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
21
Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode)
When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the
instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one per-
son on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in
which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other per-
son watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side.
1
To start this instrument in the Duo
mode, simultaneously hold down the [L]
button and press the [ ] (Standby/On)
switch to turn on the power.
“DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point
and the keyboard is divided into two sections:
one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice.
2
One person should play the left Voice
section of the keyboard while the other
plays the right Voice section.
Selecting a Voice
Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in
“Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16.
How sounds are output in the Duo mode
Notes played in the left Voice section sound from
the left side speaker while notes played in the
right Voice section sound from the right side
speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This out-
put setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut”
setting (Function 027; page 41).
Using sustain in the Duo mode
Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice
sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by
using one of the following methods in the Duo
mode like the usual mode.
• Press the foot switch (page 13) connected to the
[SUSTAIN] jack.
• Set “Sustain” (Function 023; page 41) to on.
Style Playback in the Duo mode
Although full Style features (accompaniment)
cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part
of a Style can be played back while playing the
left/right Voices normally.
Recording in the Duo mode
The right Voice section and the left Voice section
are recorded on the same track.
3
To exit from the Duo mode, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the
power, and turn the power back on again
normally.
• The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the
keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice).
• In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed
from F
#
3.
• When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162
to 188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice.
• Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio
and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode.
DuoMode
on
Equivalent to C3
Split Point: 066 (F#3)
Left Voice
Equivalent to C3
Right Voice
NOTE
NOTE
• In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteris-
tics of the strereo sound may differ from those in the nor-
mal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate”
(page 41). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference
may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit fea-
tures a different stereo pan position.
• Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left
Voice section and the right Voice section.
• While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is main-
tained even when the power is turned off.
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
22
Playing Styles
This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate
“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of
Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.
1
Press the [STYLE] button, then use the
number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select
the desired Style.
The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in
the Style List (page 65).
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
on the Auto Accompaniment.
With this operation, the area of the keyboard to
the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the
“Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for
specifying the chords.
The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment
range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can
be changed from the default of F#2 via Function
number 006 (page 40).
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.
4
Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-
ment range to start playback.
Play a melody with the right hand and chords with
the left hand.
For information about chords, refer to “Chord
Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the
Chord Dictionary function (page 26).
5
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
playback.
You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations
to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,
refer to page 24.
Adjusting the Style Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Style play-
back and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume.
This can be set via Function number 001 (page 40).
8BtModrn
002
Style Name
Style Number
This icon appears when the [STYLE]
button is pressed.
LoveSong
025
This icon appears when auto-
matic accompaniment is on.
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto
Accompaniment
range
036
(C1)
048
(C2)
060
(C3)
072
(C4)
084
(C5)
096
(C6)
To play back the rhythm part only
If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm
part can be played back, and you can play a melody
performance using the entire keyboard range.
LoveSong
025
Flashes when sync start is on.
Split Point
• Since the Pianist category Styles (150–158) have no
rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start
rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make
sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page.
NOTE
Playing Styles
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
23
If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired
Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music
Database, just selecting the favorite music genre
calls up the ideal settings.
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start
are automatically turned on.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to
select the desired Music Database.
This operation calls up the panel settings such as
Voice and Style that are registered to the selected
Music Database. The category name of Music
Database List is provided on the front panel, or in
the Music Database List (page 66).
3
Play the keyboard as described in Steps
4–5 on page 22.
In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an
external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a com-
puter) as Style number 159 which will be used in the
same way as the Preset Styles.
1
Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a
computer to this instrument by using
Musicsoft Downloader.
For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Oper-
ations” (page 5) on the website. You can transfer
two or more Styles to this instrument although
only a single Style can be registered to Style
number 159.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until “StyleReg” (Function 008;
page 40) appears.
After about two seconds, a registerable Style file
name will appear in the display.
3
If necessary, select the desired Style by
using the [+] or [-] button.
4
Press the [0] button.
A confirmation message for the register operation
will appear.
5
Press the [+/YES] button to actually reg-
ister the file.
Using the Music Database
AlvFever
001
Registering a Style File
StyleReg
008
Playing Styles
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
24
Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to
match the song you are playing. These instructions
cover a typical example for using the Sections.
1–3
Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to
select Main A or Main B.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the
Intro section.
6
Play a chord with your left hand to start
playback of the Intro.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown
below). For information on how to enter chords,
see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 25.
7
After the Intro finishes, play the key-
board according to the progression of
the Song you are playing.
Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-
odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/
AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will
change to Fill-in then Main A or B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
The Section switches to the Ending. When the
Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-
cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-
ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing
back.
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the
Te mpo va l u e.
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset
the value to the default tempo of the current Style or
Song.
Using the Tap function
While a Song or Style is playing back, press the
[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo
to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is
stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times
to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for
a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat
Song or Style.
Style Variations—Sections
MAIN A
Current Section
INTRO≥A
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto Accompa-
niment range
Changing the Tempo
FILL A≥B
ENDING
Tempo
090
Current Tempo value
Playing Styles
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
25
For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accom-
paniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musi-
cally, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.
indicates the root note.
• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:
m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2
• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.
• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.
• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm
and bass parts will be played.
Chord Types for Style Playback
Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh
C
Cm
7
C
Cm
7
CM
7
D
Dm
7
D
Dm
7
DM
7
E
Em
7
E
Em
7
EM
7
C
F
Fm
7
F
Fm
7
FM
7
G
Gm
7
G
Gm
7
GM
7
A
Am
7
A
Am
7
AM
7
B
Bm
7
B
Bm
7
BM
7
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two,
or three fingers.
For root “C”
To play a major chord
Press the root note ()
of the chord.
To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together
with the nearest white and
black keys to the left of it (three
keys altogether).
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
Playing Styles
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
26
The Dictionary function is useful when you know the
name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn
how to play it.
1
Press and hold the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer
than a second to call up “Dict.”
“Dict.” will appear in the display.
This operation will divide the entire keyboard into
the three ranges as illustrated below.
• The range to the right of “ROOT ”:
Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no
sound.
• The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and
“ROOT ”:
Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no
sound.
• The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”:
Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in
the above two ranges.
2
As an example, learn how to play a GM7
(G major seventh) chord.
2-1.
Press the “G” key in the section to the right
of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as
the root note.
2-2.
Press the key labeled “M7” in the section
between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.”
The notes you should play for the specified
chord (root note and chord type) are con-
veniently shown in the display, both as
notation and in the keyboard diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press
the [+]/[-] buttons.
3
Following the notation and keyboard
diagram in the display, try playing a
chord in the range to the left of “CHORD
TYPE .”
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell
sound signals your success and the chord name
in the display flashes.
Looking Up Chords Using the
Chord Dictionary
Dict.
Hold for longer
than a second.
Chord Type range
Root range
Keyboard
playing range
Far right of
the key-
board
• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually
indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers
to C major. However, when specifying major chords
here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the
root note.
• These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary
function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(
#
11 ) ,
b
5, M7
b
5, M7aug,
m7(11), mM7(9), mM7
b
5, 7
b
5, sus2
Dict.
001
Dict.
001
Chord name (root and type)
Individual notes of chord
(keyboard)
Notation of
chord
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
27
Playing Songs
You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of
the functions, such as Lesson.
Song Category
The Songs are organized by category as listed below.
Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo
Songs in sequence.
When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in
sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, play-
back will repeat continuously, starting again from the
first Song (001).
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then use the
Number buttons to select the desired
Song.
Refer to the Song List (page 64).
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
playback.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button
again.
To change the tempo:
Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24.
Adjusting the Song Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Song play-
back and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume.
This can be set via Function number 002 (page 40).
These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.
Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice
with ease, and another more challenging version.
We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down
from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody
of these songs with your right hand.
Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data).
(Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand
first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.)
These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other
instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.
These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano
pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orches-
tral backing.
Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing the
keyboard according to the LCD display indications.
Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions.
Songs (User Songs) you record yourself.
Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 5).
Listening to a Demo Song
• You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing
the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to
the beginning of the selected Song.
Selecting and Playing Back a
Song
NOTE
Elise 1
004
Song name
Song number
Appears after the [Song]
button is pressed.
Playing Songs
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
28
With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button
will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeat-
edly. This setting can be changed so that, for exam-
ple, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting
you use the instrument as a background music
source.
1
Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer
than a second.
“DemoGrp” (Function 042; page 42) is shown in
the display for a few seconds, followed by the cur-
rent repeat playback target.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select a play-
back group.
3
Press the [DEMO] button to start play-
back.
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again
or press the [START/STOP] button.
Random Song Playback
When the Demo Group (above) is set to something
other than “Demo,” the playback order via the
[DEMO] button can be changed between numerical
order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNC-
TION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Func-
tion 043;
page 42
) is called up, then select “Normal”
or “Random.”
Like the transport controls on an audio player, this
instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW)
and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song.
You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other
desired Voice.
1
Select a Song.
2
Select the desired Voice.
3
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for
longer than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display
for a few seconds, and the selected Voice
replaces the Song’s original melody Voice.
BGM Playback
Demo Preset songs (001–003)
Preset All preset songs (001–102)
User All User songs (155–159)
Download All songs transferred from a computer (160–)
• When User songs and Download songs data do not
exist, Demo songs are played back.
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTE
Song Fast Forward, Fast
Reverse, and Pause
• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast
Forward will only work within the range between A and B.
• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song
playback by using the [DEMO] button.
Changing the Melody Voice
• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody
Voice.
• You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song.
Fast Reverse
During playback, press
this button to rapidly
return to an earlier
point in the Song.
Fast Forward
During playback, press this
button to rapidly skip ahead
to a later point in the Song.
Pause
During playback, press
this button to pause play-
back, and press again to
start from that point.
NOTE
NOTE
Playing Songs
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
29
You can play back only a specific section of a Song
repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B
point (end point) in one-measure increments.
1
Start playback of the Song (page 27).
2
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the start point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A
point.
3
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the end point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set
the B point.
The specified A-B section of the song will now
play repeatedly.
4
To cancel repeat playback, press the
[A-B REPEAT] button.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-
ton.
As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below),
Songs other than Song numbers 115 to 154 consist
of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individu-
ally by pressing the corresponding button, L or R.
By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off dur-
ing playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned
on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on
the keyboard.
A-B Repeat
• You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song
is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to
select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT]
button for each point, then start playback.
• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the
Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting
playback.
• The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you
select another Song mode.
AB
Repeat playback of this section
NOTE
NOTE
Turning Each Part On/Off
• Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the
Parts.
FrereJac
020
010
Lit: Track con-
tains data
Unlit: Track is
muted or con-
tains no data
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
30
Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers
You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player,
with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you
play the keyboard along with playback of your music player.
1
Turn off the power for both the external
audio device and this instrument.
2
Connect the audio device to the instru-
ment’s [AUX IN] jack.
Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at
one side for connecting to this instrument and the
plug matching the output jack of the external
audio device at the other side.
3
Turn on the external audio device, then
this instrument.
4
Play back the connected external audio
device.
The sound of the audio device is output through
the speakers of this instrument.
5
Adjust the volume balance between the
external audio device and this instrument.
If possible, adjust the playback level of the external
audio device first, to achieve optimum balance.
6
Play the keyboard along with the sound
of the audio device.
7
After finishing the performance, stop
playback of the audio device.
When the sound of an external audio device is output
through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the
volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You
can use the function to cancel the melody part then
practice it via the keyboard.
1
Play back the connected external audio
device.
2
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton to turn it on.
When the melody or vocal sound may
not be canceled (or lowered) as expected
1
Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]
button for longer than a second to call
up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 41)
while the Melody Suppressor function is
turned on.
2
Adjust the pan position of the sound to
be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+],
[-] buttons.
3
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton again to turn it off.
• You can adjust the level of the input from the external
audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function num-
ber 003 (page 40) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons.
• Before connecting, turn off the power of both this
instrument and the external audio device. Also,
before turning the power on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage
to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent
hearing loss may occur.
• After connecting, first turn on the power to the exter-
nal audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
Audio device (Portable
audio player, etc.)
Stereo-mini
plug
NOTE
CAUTION
NOTICE
Lowering the volume of a melody
part (Melody Suppressor function)
• If an external audio device is not properly connected to
the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor
function cannot be turned on or shown in the display,
even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button.
• Depending on the particular music content, the melody
or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if
the Melody Suppressor is turned on.
MelodySP
on
Appears when Melody Suppressor is on
NOTE
SupprPan
026
C
Hold for longer than a second.
L63 – C – R63
(Left – Center – Right)
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
31
Using the Song Lesson Feature
You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,”
“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a
Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in
playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a spe-
cific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we
suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song
Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registra-
tion at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score
in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To
obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration
at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in
the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the
entire Song.
1
Prepare the Song Book.
Download the Song Book from the above web-
site, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs
at the end of this manual.
The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are
pre-programmed) will differ depending on the
Song. For details, refer to the Song Book.
2
Press the [SONG] button, then select a
Song for your lesson.
Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the
“LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corre-
sponding page of the Song Book.
3
Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button
to engage this lesson.
The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R”
or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating
that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If
you have already passed several Steps, the next
Step number appears on the display.
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
Lesson.
After the lead-in, playback of the current Step
starts.
5
Practice the phrase in the current Step.
Referring to the notation in the Song Book and
the notes shown on the display, press the notes.
Downloading the Song Book
Keys To Success
• All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103–
154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN
TO PLAY” category Songs.
NOTE
Elise 1
004
• For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is
applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may
be slower than original.
Step01
Appears when Keys to
Success is on
Lesson part
: Right-hand lesson
: Left-hand lesson
: Both-hands lesson
Current Step number
Step01
001
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
32
6
Confirm the evaluation in the current
Step.
When the current Step reaches the end, your per-
formance will be evaluated and your score (from
0–100) is shown in the display.
A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did
not pass this Step and you should try the same
Step again, which begins automatically. A score
of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step
and you should try the next Step, which begins
automatically.
7
Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on.
In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all
the way through the Song. When you pass all
Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automati-
cally be turned off and playback stops.
8
To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO
SUCCESS] button.
Confirming the Passing Status
You can confirm the passing status of each Song
simply by selecting a Song and each Step.
When Step is selected
When Song is selected
Clearing the Passing Status
You can clear existing passing status entries for the
entire Song or a specific Step of the Song.
To clear the passing status entries of all Steps:
Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS
TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds,
with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared”
message will appear on the display.
To clear the passing status entry for a specific
Step:
Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success,
select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS
TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds.
A “Cleared” message will appear on the display.
• If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the
Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of
the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice”
appears in the display.
• Even during lesson, you can select another Step by
using the [+]/[-] buttons.
Excellen
068
Displayed when you’ve
passed the Step.
NOTE
NOTE
• This operation cannot be executed during playback.
Step01
001
✩ : Passed
No information: Not yet passed
Elise 1
004
001
✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet
passed in addition to the last Step
✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed
✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step
✩✩✩ : All Steps passed
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
33
Lesson 1—Listening
In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The
model melody/chords of the part you selected will
sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.
Lesson 2—Timing
In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the
notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong
notes, the correct notes shown in the display will
sound.
Lesson 3—Waiting
In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on
the display. The Song pauses until you play the right
note, and playback tempo will change to match the
speed at which you are playing at.
1
Press the [SONG] button then select a
Song for your lesson.
2
Press either or both the [R] and [L] but-
tons to select the part you want to prac-
tice.
3
Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button to start playback of
the Song Lesson.
Pressing this button repeatedly will change the
Lesson number from 1: LISTENING 2: TIMING
3: WAITING off 1…. Press this button until
the desired number is shown on the display.
4
When Lesson playback reaches to the
end, check your evaluation Grade on the
display.
“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your per-
formance in four levels.
After the evaluation display has appeared, the
lesson will start again from the beginning.
5
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Listening, Timing and Waiting
• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained dur-
ing Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF
via the Function number 041 (page 42).
• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs
(SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page
43), but cannot be applied to the User Songs.
• In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the
current Song does not contain a left-hand part.
NOTE
NOTE
RightLeft
BothHand
Left-hand
lesson
Right-hand
lesson
Both-hands
lesson
NOTE
• During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by
pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any
time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
• The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting;
page 16) during the Lesson.
• When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key
position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave
units), depending on the selected Voice.
• The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during les-
sons.
• Songs 115 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening,
Timing and Waiting Lessons.
NOTE
~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~
~~~~
~~
Excellent!
Very Good!
Good
OK
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
34
You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page
31) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson
(page 33).
1
Enable the Keys to Success lesson.
Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 31.
2
Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-]
buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly
to select the desired lesson.
The selected lesson playback starts under the
Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the
current Step via the selected Lesson. As evalua-
tion for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play
key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is
not available.
3
To return to only the Keys to Success
mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select
“off.”
4
To exit from the Lesson mode, press the
[KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.
You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by
selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks
pre-programmed in the Preset Songs (excepting the
Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm
the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page
5).
Practicing only a single Phrase
During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT]
button at the phrase you want to practice. The corre-
sponding Phrase number will appear in the display
and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off
the L or R part (page 29), then practice the phrase
which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied.
Even during repeat playback, you can select any
other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you
can return to normal playback by pressing the
[PHRASE REPEAT] button again.
Using Phrase Repeat with Listening,
Timing or Waiting
With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTEN-
ING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or
three times to start and use Lesson playback with
Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again sev-
eral times to exit from the Lesson mode stops play-
back and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode.
Practicing two or more Phrases
By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B
(as the end point), you can practice two or more
Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback,
press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current
Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the
desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again
to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display,
and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts.
To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button
again.
Keys to Success with Listening,
Timing or Waiting
Phrase Repeat
Phrase mark
Repeat playback of this
section
• In this status, the evaluation function is not available.
• You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped
by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons.
• Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between
Point A and the end of the Song.
REPEAT
P03
Appears when the Phrase
Repeat function is on
Phrase number
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
35
Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the
Chords (Chord Study)
You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by
playing back Song numbers 103 to 114 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers
103 to 109 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am,
Bm; respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the
chords one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 110 to 114 consist of several
chords strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord
progressions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by
playing back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music
notation and key/chord indications shown in the display.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 103
to 109 in the “CHORD STUDY” category
by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and
Playing Back a Song” on page 27
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
3
Play the keyboard while looking at the
notes shown on the display.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 110 to
114 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons.
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
3
Play the keyboard while looking at the
notes shown on the display.
Listen to the basic chord progression, and play
along with the Song repeatedly until you can
smoothly perform and play along with the chord
changes.
Hear and experience a sound of
a single chord
• When playing the keyboard while playing back a
Song, you should turn off any parts you don’t intend
to have played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the
maximum number of simultaneous notes.
• You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing
the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button.
ChdStd01
103
003
NOTICE
NOTE
Hear and experience basic
chord progressions
• You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing
the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button.
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
36
Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song
Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typ-
ical chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by
playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the
display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence—
from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and
naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you
to practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords.
1
Select a Song from Song numbers 115 to
154 in the “Chord Progression” category
by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and
Playing Back a Song” on page 27.
2
Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button.
After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the
display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and
the number of the keys to be pressed are shown.
3
Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the num-
ber of the keys to be played.
Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number
of the keys to press is increased from just one
root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three
notes (3Notes) and four notes (All).
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to play
back the selected Song.
5
Play the keyboard looking at the notes
shown on the display.
6
Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button
again to turn the Chord Progression
function off.
To change the key of a Song:
When Chord Progression is on, press one of the
keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right
of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to
change the tonic pitch of the Song.
For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song
of C major, the key changes to D major.
You can practice the playing the chords in combina-
tion with “Waiting” (page 33) of the Lesson function
by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button once.
• The initial key setting is C major or A minor.
• The number of the keys to press can also be set by using
the number buttons [1]–[4].
• When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5,
the notes will not sound.
C 1Note
CPg
The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C
The number of the keys
to press: 1
Appears when Chord
Progression is on.
NOTE
C 2Notes
CPg
NOTE
C 1Note
CPg
001
NOTE
• The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback.
The number of the keys to be played
Only one root note (1Note)
Press only the root note of the chord.
Two notes (2Notes)
Press the 3
rd
interval of a chord along with the root
note, and understand the difference between major
chords and minor chords.
Three notes (3Notes)
Press the 5
th
interval of a chord along with the root
note and the 3
rd
.
Four notes (All)
Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very often,
chords are played with just three notes; however,
another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes added.
Keep in mind that depending on the chord, there may
be no 4
th
note.
Play the chords in combination
with “Waiting” of the Lesson
function
• Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on
the display (excluding the range of C5
–
B5, which are used to
change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the
chords, the playback will progress.
C
D
b
E
b
F
#
A
b
B
b
DEFGAB
Root range
Far right of
the keyboard
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
37
Recording Your Performance
You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers
155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument.
You can record your performance to the following two
tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously.
Track 1:
Your melody performance is recorded to this track.
Track 2:
Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord
changes and Section changes), is recorded to this
track.
Recording Data Capacity:
A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded to the five User Songs.
The operation is convenient for recording a new Song
without having to specify a track.
1
Make the desired settings such as Voice
and Style settings.
If you want to record only the melody perfor-
mance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to
record Style playback as well as melody perfor-
mance, turn ACMP on (page 22).
2
Press the [REC] button to enable the
Record mode.
On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User
Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select
another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons.
To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC]
button again to stop flashing on the display.
3
Play the keyboard to start recording.
If ACMP is turned on, you can independently
record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by
pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing
the Section (page 24).
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.
When using a Style, you can stop recording also
by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then
waiting until playback ends.
5
To play back the recorded Song, press
the [START/STOP] button.
Track Structure of a Song
Quick Recording
• If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1
(Song Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In
this case, since you will record over and erase any
previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you
save your important data to a computer (see page
43).
• ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you
can select another Style in this status by using the
[STYLE] and Number buttons.
• After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown
on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the
power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so
can damage the internal memory and result in a loss
of data.
User 1
rEC
001
User Song Number
Flashes
NOTICE
NOTE
36 48
7260
Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)
Auto Accompani-
ment range
NOTICE
Recording Your Performance
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
38
1
Make the desired settings, such as
those of Voice or Style.
If you want to record the melody performance,
turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record
Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22).
2
While holding down the [REC] button,
press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to
engage the Record mode.
If you want to record Style playback, make sure to
select the Track 2. If you want to record melody
performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as
desired. The illustration below is the example
when selecting Track 2.
3
Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the
User Song you want to record.
If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for
example and Track 1 contains already recorded
data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning
on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will deter-
mine whether you listen to a previously recorded
Track or not while recording a new Track.
4
Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in
“Quick Recording.”
1
Press the [SONG] button then select the
desired User Song by using the Number
buttons.
2
Press and hold the [REC] button for lon-
ger than a second.
A confirmation message appears.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message appears again.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
Song.
A “Writing!” message appears while the track is
being cleared.
Recording to a Specified Track
Limitations while Recording
• You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome
click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings.
• The following settings and buttons are not available,
or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded:
ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus
Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] but-
ton, [PORTABLE GRAND] button.
001
User 1
rEC
Clearing a User Song
ClrUser1
YES
Hold for longer
than a second.
Sure?
YES
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
39
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favor-
ite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be
memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9.
1
Make the desired settings such as those
for Voice and Style.
2
Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM-
ORY] button for longer than a second.
“MemNo.?” appears on the display.
3
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to mem-
orize the current panel settings.
If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, an “Overwr?” message
appears in the display. To overwrite, press the
[+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO].
1
Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button.
“LoadNo.?” appears on the display.
2
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call
up the panel settings you memorized.
The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears
in the display.
The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed
by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons.
Memorizing Panel Settings to
the Registration Memory
• If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, the previous data is deleted
and overwritten by the new data.
• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings
to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may
be damaged or lost.
MemNo.?
Hold for longer
than a second.
NOTICE
Recalling Panel Settings from
the Registration Memory
Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume,
Tempo, Main A/B
Voice settings
Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of
the related Functions
Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the
related Functions
Effect settings:
Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type
Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/
off and all settings of the related Functions
Other settings:
Panel Sustain on/off, Transpose, Voice
output
* When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be
recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style
settings can be recorded or called up.
LoadNo.?
REGIST 1
01
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
40
The Functions
The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters
such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until the desired item appears.
Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the
Function number increases one by one. To
decrease the Function number by one, simultane-
ously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and
press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Func-
tion number by one, simultaneously hold down
the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button
briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button
does not change the Function number.
After a few seconds, the Function name may be
replaced with the setting value depending on the
selected Function.
2
Set the value by using the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Function List
• The Function number does not appear in the display
during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat
value appears instead.
StyleVol
100
001
Current value
Function number
Function name
NOTE
• To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons;
[SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE].
Direct numeric
entry.
• Increment
value by 1.
•Yes
•On
Press simultaneously
to recall the default
setting.
• Decrement
value by 1.
•No
•Off
NOTE
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
Volume
001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 22)
002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 27)
003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100
Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to
the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 30)
Overall
004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.
005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz
Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in
approx. 0.2Hz increments.
006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2)
Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split
“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)
and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-
ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
007 Touch Response TouchRes
1 (Soft),
2 (Medium),
3 (Hard),
4 (Fixed)
2 (Medium)
Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in
response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Fixed) is selected,
Touch Response is off and the volume level does not change at all
regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard.
Style file
008 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn –
Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from
computer (page 23).
The Functions
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
41
Main Voice (page 16)
009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 *
Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing
along with a Song or a Style.
010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Dual Voice (page 17)
012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Dual Voice.
013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Split Voice (page 17)
016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Split Voice.
017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Effects
020 Reverb Type Reverb
1–3 (Hall 1–3)
4–5 (Room 1–2)
6–7 (Stage 1–2)
8–9 (Plate 1–2)
10 (Off)
** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 68)
021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64
Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.
022 Chorus Type Chorus
1 (Chorus1)
2 (Chorus2)
3 (Chorus3)
4 (Flanger1)
5 (Flanger2)
6 (off)
** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 68)
023 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off.
024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ
1 (Speaker)
2 (Headphone)
3 (Boost)
4 (Piano)
5 (Bright)
6 (Mild)
1 (Speaker)
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum
sound in different listening situations. (page 14)
025 Wide Type Wide
1 (Wide1)
2 (Wide2)
3 (Wide3)
2 (Wide2)
Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.
Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 18)
026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 C
Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio
device to be canceled or lowered (page 30).
027 Voice Output VoiceOut
1 (Normal)
2 (Separate)
2 (Separate)
When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21) is
on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance
sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the
left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance
sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the perfor-
mance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker.
Harmony (page 19)
028
Harmony/Arpeggio
Ty pe
Harm/Arp
001–026 (Harmony)
027–176 (Arpeggio)
*
Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is
selected.
029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 *
Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the
Harmony types 1–5 is selected.
Arpeggio (page 19)
030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo
1 (Original)
2 (Thru)
**
If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume
matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original”
is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume
regardless of your playing strength.
031 Pedal Function Pdl Func
1 (Sustain)
2 (Arp Hold)
3 (Hold+Sus)
* Refer to the page 20.
Computer (page 42)
032 PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF
Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer
(page 42).
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
The Functions
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
42
* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.
** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio.
PC Mode (FUNCTION 032)
The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).
* An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use.
** Cannot be set independently.
MIDI
033 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the inter-
nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.
034 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal
clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.
035 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO –
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/
YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done
immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer.
Metronome (page 16)
036
Time Signature
Numerator
TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
037
Time Signature
Denominator
TimeSigD
Half note, Quarter
note, Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
** Determines the length of each metronome beat.
038 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Lesson (page 31)
039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 01
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred
from a computer.
040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 02
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The
setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from
a computer.
041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON
This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON,
playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are play-
ing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained
regardless of the speed you are playing at.
Demo (page 27)
042 Demo Group DemoGrp
1 (Demo)
2 (Preset)
3 (User)
4 (Download)
1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group.
043 Demo Play Mode PlayMode
1 (Normal)
2 (Random)
1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode.
044 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is
set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button
is pressed.
Auto Power Off (page 14)
045 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff
OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/
120 (minutes)
30 minutes
Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is
automatically turned off.
Battery (page 13)
046 Battery Type Battery
1 (Alkaline)
2 (Ni-MH)
1 (Alkaline)
Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.
Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery
Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
PC1 PC2* OFF
LOCAL Off Off On
EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off
MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes
MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes
MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes
• MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs.
NOTE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
43
Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad
This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument
Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard
performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/
Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer con-
nected via a USB cable. For details on using a com-
puter with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-
related Operations” (page 5) on the website.
By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument,
you can take advantage of various functions. To
make connections, prepare the i-UX1 (sold sepa-
rately), then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual” (page 5) on the website.
Backup and Initialization
The following Backup parameters will be maintained
even if the power is turned off.
In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the
data (including Style data that have not been loaded)
transferred from the connected computer will be
maintained even if you turn off the power.
You can initialize your original data via the following
two methods.
Backup Clear
This operation initializes the backup parameters.
While holding down the highest white key, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Flash Clear
This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that
have been transferred from a computer. Note that
Style data registered to Style numbers 159 will be
maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest
white key and the three highest black keys, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Connecting to a computer
• If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instru-
ment, you need to register it to this instrument for Style play-
back. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on
page 23.
USB cable
USB
terminal
instrumentcomputer
USB
terminal
NOTE
Data that can be transferred from a computer to
this instrument (and vice versa).
• Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1
• Style: (.sty)
• Backup File: PSR-E353.BUP *
* Backup parameters (as described below) other than
“Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred
and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a
single Backup file.
Connecting an iPhone/iPad
• This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256
Song files.
NOTE
Backup Parameters
Backup parameters
• User Songs (page 37)
• Style Number 159 (page 23)
• Registration Memory (page 39)
• Passing status of Song and Step (page 32)
• FUNCTION Settings: (page 40)
Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo,
Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel,
Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Bat-
tery Type
Initialization
• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you
have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a
computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For
details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5).
NOTICE
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
44
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-
ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from
the instrument.
Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or head-
phones when using the instrument with the application
on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch.
When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or
when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 033.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does
not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand area
are used only for entering the chord root and type.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems
to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual
voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.
Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.
The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the
selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it
by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then
play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–
26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is neces-
sary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.
The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to
“Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 034).
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
• Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-
related function.
• The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on.
The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 40 Function 001) is set to an appropri-
ate level.
Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set
the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 40 Function 006).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords
are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-
enth).
• Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-
ment based only on the root.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-
site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off
the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is
properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual
sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
• The volume is too soft.
• The sound quality is poor.
• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the included AC adaptor.
Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated
(page 14). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in
the Function settings (Function 045; page 42).
When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off
suddenly and unexpectedly.
This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power
may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly.
Appendix
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
45
Memo
46
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song Book Sample
This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).
The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and
important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.
* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.
This example introduces part of the English song book.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Für Elise
Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.
The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.
In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!
First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!
Für Elise With Step Map
.......................................................................12
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” ..................................... 16
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16
First Half Review ...................................................................... 17
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18
“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18
“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19
Second Half Review ................................................................... 19
Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19
L. v. Beethoven
Song Book Sample
47
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Before Playing...
Sit Correctly Finger Numbering
Left Right
3
1
1
5
3
4
4
5
2
2
Sit near the middle of the keyboard.
Reading the Score
The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef
BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDEFGACC
M
i
d
d
l
e
Treble clef
Bass clef
Time Signatures and Counting Time
4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time
3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time
1 octave
2 black keys 3 black keys
Accidentals
(Sharp) Raise a semitone
B
(Flat) Lower a semitone
N
(Natural) Return to normal pitch
Key signature
Clef
Time signature
Notes and Rests
Whole note
Dotted half note
Half note
Dotted quarter note
Quarter note
Eighth note
Sixteenth note
Whole note rest
Dotted half note rest
Half note rest
Dotted quarter note rest
Quarter note rest
Eighth note rest
Sixteenth note rest
1234
Song Book Sample
48
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004
Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.
Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as
you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency.
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
With Step Map
From here...
Song Book Sample
49
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
...to here From here...
...to here
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Song Book Sample
50
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”
Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand.
We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the
illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get
started!
You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly.
F
i
n
g
e
r
s
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
h
i
s
e
x
e
r
c
i
s
e
Right
Tip-toe
ABCD
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
A E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Go back to the beginning and play it again.
Song Book Sample
51
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.
The melody will be built up little by little.
Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.
Short break
Almost done
E
Song Book Sample
52
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”
And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.
It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start.
Don’t play the black keys too strongly.
Left hand
AEAE
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Diligent Practice Time
Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play
smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first
phrase.
Song Book Sample
53
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
OK, let’s begin the second half!
You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs.
It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.
Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.
First Half Review
You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?
Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble
playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.
Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note!
Song Book Sample
54
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
EEE
Jump to the
next E!
And again!
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”
The first note has a staccato dot.
Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note!
Left hand
“EEEEE!”
The only note in this step is E!
Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.
Y
o
u
c
a
n
p
l
a
y
t
h
i
s
w
i
t
h
o
n
l
y
t
h
e
s
e
f
i
n
g
e
r
s
!
Song Book Sample
55
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Left
Right
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
“Left! Right! Left! Right!”
Play “D
E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.
Have the next hand ready in position to play D
so you won’t have to rush.
Second Half Review
Try playing all the way through the second half.
As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps.
Play the Whole Song!
This is the finishing step!
Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.
Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.
56
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Maximum Polyphony
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless
of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number
of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the
total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is
correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice
and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded,
earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes
have priority (last note priority).
• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each
voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the
instrument via MIDI from an external device.
• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program
Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-
gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take
this into consideration.
• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after
the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)
is held.
NOTE
Voice List
Panel Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
1 0 112 1 Grand Piano
2 0 112 2 Bright Piano
3 0 112 7 Harpsichord
4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano
5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
601133CP80
E.PIANO
7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines
9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano
10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
12 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ
14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ
15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
17 0 112 19 Rock Organ
18 0 114 19 Purple Organ
19 0 112 18 Click Organ
20 0 116 17 Bright Organ
21 0 127 19 Theater Organ
22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
25 0 112 20 Pipe Organ
26 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
29 0 113 24 Bandoneon
30 0 113 23 Modern Harp
31 0 112 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
32 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar
33 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven
34 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
35 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
36 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
37 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar
38 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
39 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
40 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
41 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
42 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
43 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
44 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass
45 0 112 34 Finger Bass
46 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
47 0 112 35 Pick Bass
48 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
49 0 112 37 Slap Bass
50 0 121 40 Funk Bass
51 0 112 39 Synth Bass
52 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
53 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
54 0 112 49 Strings
55 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
56 0 115 50 Marcato Strings
57 0 113 50 Slow Strings
58 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
59 0 112 51 Synth Strings
60 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
61 0 112 41 Violin
62 0 112 43 Cello
63 0 112 44 Contrabass
64 0 112 47 Harp
65 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
66 0 112 53 Choir
67 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
68 0 112 55 Air Choir
69 0 112 54 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
70 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax
71 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
72 0 112 66 Alto Sax
73 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
74 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
75 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
76 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble
77 0 112 72 Clarinet
78 0 112 69 Oboe
79 0 112 70 English Horn
80 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
81 0 112 57 Trumpet
82 0 112 58 Trombone
83 0 113 58 Trombone Section
84 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
85 0 112 61 French Horn
86 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
87 0 112 62 Brass Section
88 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
89 0 116 62 Octave Brass
90 0 113 63 80s Brass
91 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
92 0 115 63 Funky Brass
93 0 114 63 Techno Brass
94 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
95 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute
96 0 112 74 Flute
97 0 112 73 Piccolo
98 0 112 76 Pan Flute
99 0 112 75 Recorder
100 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH
101 0 112 81 Square Lead
Voic e
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
57
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices
sound at the same time.
** Selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234 will turn on
Arpeggio.
102 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
103 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw
104 0 112 88 Under Heim
105 0 112 85 Portatone
106 0 115 82 Analogon
107 0 119 82 Fargo
108 0 112 86 Voice Lead
109 0 121 82 Funky Lead
110 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven
111 0 121 89 Dream Heaven
112 0 113 89 Symbiont
113 0 112 99 Stardust
114 0 112 101 Brightness
115 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
116 0 112 95 Equinox
117 0 112 89 Fantasia
118 0 113 90 Dark Moon
1190113101Bell Pad
120 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad
121 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance
PERCUSSION
122 0 112 12 Vibraphone
123 0 112 13 Marimba
124 0 112 14 Xylophone
125 0 112 115 Steel Drums
126 0 112 9 Celesta
127 0 112 11 Music Box
128 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
129 0 112 48 Timpani
WORLD
130 0 112 106 Banjo
13 1 0 0 111 Fidd le
132 0 0 110 Bagpipe
133 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1
134 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
135 0 96 16 Cimbalom
136 0 97 16 Santur
137 0 97 108 Kanoon
138 0 98 106 Oud
139 0 96 106 Rabab
140 0 0 109 Kalimba
141 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)
142 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)
143 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)
144 0 114 105 Tanpura
145 0 96 112 Pungi
146 0 117 74 Bansuri
147 0 0 105 Sitar 1
148 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
149 0 35 105 Sitar 2
150 0 0 112 Shehnai
151 0 97 106 Gopichant
152 0 116 117 Tabla
15 3 0 115 111 Er Hu
154 0 118 74 Di Zi
155 0 116 106 Pi Pa
156 0 113 108 Gu Zheng
157 0 40 47 Yang Qin
158 0 120 111 Morin Khuur
159 0 0 107 Shamisen
160 0 0 108 Koto
161 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
DUAL*
162 – – – Octave Piano
163 – – – Piano & Strings
164 – – – Piano Pad
165 – – – Octave Harpsichord
166 – – – Tiny Electric Piano
167 – – – Electric Piano Pad
168 – – – Full Organ
169 – – – Octave Jazz Guitar
170 – – – Octave Strings
171 – – – Orchestra Section
172 – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
173 – – – Strings Session
174 – – – Brass Tutti
175 – – – Orchestra Tutti
176 – – – Octave French Horns
177–––Octave Harp
178 – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani
179–––Octave Choir
180 – – – Jazz Brass Section
181 – – – Jazz Section
182 – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble
183–––Ballroom Brass
184 – – – Flute & Clarinet
185 – – – Trumpet & Trombone
186 – – – Fat Synth Brass
187–––Octave Lead
188 – – – Super 5th Lead
SOUND EFFECTS
189 0 0 121 Fret Noise
190 0 0 122 Breath Noise
191 0 0 123 Seashore
192 0 0 124 Bird Tweet
193 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
194 0 0 126 Helicopter
195 0 0 127 Applause
196 0 0 128 Gunshot
DRUM KITS
197 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
198 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
199 127 0 9 Room Kit
200 127 0 17 Rock Kit
201 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
202 127 0 26 Analog Kit
203 127 0 113 Dance Kit
204 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
205 127 0 41 Brush Kit
206 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
207 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.
208 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1
209 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2
210 126 0 37 Arabic Kit
211 126 0 41 Cuban Kit
212 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
213 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
214 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit
ARPEGGIO**
215 – – – Concerto
216–––Latin Rock
217 – – – Brass Section
218 – – – Piano Ballad
219 – – – Synth Sequence
220 – – – Guitarist
221 – – – Pickin'
222 – – – Spanish
223 – – – Funky Clavi
224 – – – Harpeggio
225 – – – Finger Bass Left
226 – – – Combo Jazz Left
227 – – – Paul's Bass Left
228 – – – Trance Bass Left
229 – – – Acid Bass Left
230 – – – Piano Ballad Left
231 – – – Salsa Piano Left
232 – – – Piano Arpeggio Left
233 – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left
234 – – – Strum Left
Voic e
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
58
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
XGlite Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG PIANO
235 0 0 1 Grand Piano
236 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
237 0 40 1 Piano Strings
2380411Dream
239 0 0 2 Bright Piano
240 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
241 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
242 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
243 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
244 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano
245 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
246 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
247 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
248 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
249 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
250 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
251 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
252 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
253 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1
254 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
255 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
256 0 0 8 Clavi
257 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
258 0 0 9 Celesta
259 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
260 0 0 11 Music Box 1
261 0 64 11 Music Box 2
262 0 0 12 Vibraphone
263 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
264 0 0 13 Marimba
265 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
266 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
267 0 97 13 Balimba
268 0 98 13 Log Drums
269 0 0 14 Xylophone
270 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
271 0 96 15 Church Bells
272 0 97 15 Carillon
XG ORGAN
273 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1
274 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
275 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1
276 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2
277 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1
278 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3
279 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ
280 0 64 17 Organ Bass
281 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2
282 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
283 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
284 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1
285 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ
286 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
287 0 33 18 Light Organ
288 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
289 0 0 19 Rock Organ
290 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
291 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ
292 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ
293 0 0 20 Church Organ 1
294 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
295 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
296 0 40 20 Notre Dame
297 0 64 20 Organ Flute
298 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
299 0 0 21 Reed Organ
300 0 40 21 Puff Organ
301 0 0 22 Accordion
302 0 0 23 Harmonica 1
303 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
304 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1
305 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
306 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1
307 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3
308 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
309 0 96 25 Ukulele
310 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
311 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
312 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
313 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
314 0 96 26 Mandolin
315 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
316 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
317 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
318 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
319 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
320 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
321 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
322 0 45 29 Jazz Man
323 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
324 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
325 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
326 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1
327 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
328 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1
329 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
330 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
331 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
332 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
333 0 45 33
Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
334 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1
335 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark
336 0 40 34
Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
337 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
338 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
339 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
340 0 0 35 Pick Bass
341 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
342 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1
343 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
344 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
345 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
346 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
347 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
348 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
349 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
350 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
351 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
352 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
353 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
354 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
355 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
356 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
357 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
358 0 41 40 DX Bass
XG STRINGS
359 0 0 41 Violin
360 0 8 41 Slow Violin
361 0 0 42 Viola
362 0 0 43 Cello
363 0 0 44 Contrabass
364 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
365 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
366 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
367 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
368 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
Voic e
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
59
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
369 0 0 48 Timpani
XG ENSEMBLE
370 0 0 49 Strings 1
371 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
372 0 8 49 Slow Strings
373 0 35 49 60s Strings
374 0 40 49 Orchestra 1
375 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
376 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
377 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
378 0 0 50 Strings 2
379 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
380 0 8 50 Legato Strings
381 0 40 50 Warm Strings
382 0 41 50 Kingdom
383 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
384 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4
385 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
386 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
387 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
388 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
389 0 40 53 Choir Strings
390 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
391 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1
392 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
393 0 41 55 Choral
394 0 64 55 Analog Voice
395 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1
396 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
397 0 64 56 Impact
XG BRASS
398 0 0 57 Trumpet
399 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
400 0 0 58 Trombone 1
401 0 18 58 Trombone 2
402 0 0 59 Tuba
403 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
404 0 0 61 French Horn 1
405 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
406 0 32 61 French Horn 2
407 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
408 0 0 62 Brass Section
409 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
410 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
411 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
412 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
413 0 18 64 Soft Brass
414 0 41 64 Choir Brass
XG REED
415 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
416 0 0 66 Alto Sax
417 0 40 66 Sax Section
418 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
419 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
420 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
421 0 0 69 Oboe
422 0 0 70 English Horn
423 0 0 71 Bassoon
424 0 0 72 Clarinet
XG PIPE
425 0 0 73 Piccolo
426 0 0 74 Flute
427 0 0 75 Recorder
428 0 0 76 Pan Flute
429 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
430 0 0 79 Whistle
431 0 0 80 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
432 0 0 81 Square Lead 1
433 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
434 0 8 81 LM Square
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
435 0 18 81 Hollow
436 0 19 81 Shroud
437 0 64 81 Mellow
438 0 65 81 Solo Sine
439 0 66 81 Sine Lead
440 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1
441 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
442 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
443 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
444 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
445 0 20 82 Big Lead
446 0 24 82 Heavy Synth
447 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
448 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
449 0 65 83 Pure Lead
450 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
451 0 0 85 Charang Lead
452 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
453 0 0 86 Voice Lead
454 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
455 0 35 87 Big Five
456 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
457 0 16 88 Big & Low
458 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
459 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
460 0 0 89 New Age Pad
461 0 64 89 Fantasy
462 0 0 90 Warm Pad
463 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
464 0 0 92 Choir Pad
465 0 66 92 Itopia
466 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
467 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
468 0 0 95 Halo Pad
469 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
470 0 0 97 Rain
471 0 64 97 Harmo Rain
472 0 65 97 African Wind
473 0 66 97 Carib
474 0 0 98 Sound Track
475 0 27 98 Prologue
476 0 0 99 Crystal
477 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
478 0 14 99 Popcorn
479 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
480 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
481 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
482 0 41 99 Clear Bells
483 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
484 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
485 0 70 99 Air Bells
486 0 71 99 Bell Harp
487 0 72 99 Gamelimba
488 0 0 100 Atmosphere
489 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
490 0 19 100 Hollow Release
491 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
492 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
493 0 65 100 Harp Vox
494 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
495 0 0 101 Brightness
496 0 0 102 Goblins
497 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
498 0 65 102 Creeper
499 0 67 102 Ritual
500 0 68 102 To Heaven
501 0 70 102 Night
502 0 71 102 Glisten
503 0 96 102 Bell Choir
Voic e
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
60
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
504 0 0 103 Echoes
505 0 65 103 Big Pan
506 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
507 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
508 0 97 105 Tamboura
509 0 0 106 Banjo
510 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
XG PERCUSSIVE
511 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
512 0 96 113 Bonang
513 0 97 113 Altair
514 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
515 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
516 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
517 0 0 114 Agogo
518 0 0 115 Steel Drums
519 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
520 0 98 115 Thai Bells
521 0 0 116 Woodblock
522 0 96 116 Castanets
523 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
524 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
525 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1
526 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
527 0 65 118 Real Tom
528 0 66 118 Rock Tom
529 0 0 119 Synth Drum
530 0 64 119 Analog Tom
531 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
532 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
533 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1
534 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
535 64 0 4 String Slap
536 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
537 64 0 33 Shower
538 64 0 34 Thunder
539 64 0 35 Wind
540 64 0 36 Stream
541 64 0 37 Bubble
542 64 0 38 Feed
543 64 0 49 Dog
544 64 0 50 Horse
545 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
546 64 0 56 Maou
547 64 0 65 Phone Call
548 64 0 66 Door Squeak
549 64 0 67 Door Slam
550 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
551 64 0 69 Scratch Split
552 64 0 70 Wind Chime
553 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
554 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
555 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
556 64 0 83 Car Passing
557 64 0 84 Car Crash
558 64 0 85 Siren
559 64 0 86 Train
560 64 0 87 Jet Plane
561 64 0 88 Starship
562 64 0 89 Burst
563 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
564 64 0 91 Submarine
565 64 0 97 Laugh
566 64 0 98 Scream
567 64 0 99 Punch
568 64 0 100 Heartbeat
569 64 0 101 Footsteps
570 64 0 113 Machine Gun
571 64 0 114 Laser Gun
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
572 64 0 115 Explosion
573 64 0 116 Firework
Voic e
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
61
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “197: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”
(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
Voice No. 197 198 199 200 201 202
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note#NoteNote#Note
25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2
Snare Rock H Snare L Snare Rock H
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Analog L
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2
Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog H
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick
Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Analog Snare 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Snare Rock Rim Snare Rock H Analog Snare 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L
Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Electronic Tom 1 Analog Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed
Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H
Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Analog Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1Hi-Hat Pedal
Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom
Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Analog Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open
Analog Hi-Hat Open
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L
Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 Electronic Tom 4 Analog Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H
Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 5 Analog Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1
Analog Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom
Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Analog Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
62
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Voice No. 203 204 205 206 207 208
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128 126/000/040
Keyboard MIDI
Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit
StdKit1 +
Chinese Perc.
Indian Kit 1
Note#NoteNote#Note
25 C# 013C# -1
26 D 0 14 D -1
27 D# 015D# -1
28 E 0 16 E -1
29 F 0 17 F -1
30 F# 018F# -1
31 G 0 19 G -1
32 G# 020G# -1
33 A 0 21 A -1
34 A# 022A# -1 Hateli Long
35 B 0 23 B -1
Hateli Short
36 C 1 24 C 0
Baya ge
37 C# 125C# 0
Baya ke
38 D 1 26 D 0
Baya ghe
39 D# 127D# 0
Baya ka
40 E 1 28 E 0 Reverse Cymbal
Tabla na
41 F 1 29 F 0
Ta bl a ti n
42 F# 130F# 0Hi Q 2
Tablabaya dha
43 G 1 31 G 0 Analog Snare Snappy Snare Jazz H Light Brush Slap L
Ta bl a tu n
44 G# 132G# 0
Tablabaya dhin
45 A 1 33 A 0
Analog Bass Drum Dance 1
Bass Drum L Tabla di
46 A# 134A# 0 Analog Snare Open Rim
Tablabaya dhe
47 B 1 35 B 0
Analog Bass Drum Dance 2
Gran Cassa Ta bl a ti
48 C 2 36 C 1
Analog Bass Drum Dance 3
Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Tabla ne
49 C# 237C# 1 Analog Side Stick
Ta bl a ta ra n
50 D 2 38 D 1 Analog Snare Q Snare Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Snare M
Ta bl a ta k
51 D# 239D# 1
Chipri
52 E 2 40 E 1 Analog Snare + Acoustic Snare Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Snare H
Kanjira Open
53 F 2 41 F 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1
Kanjira Slap
54 F# 242F# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3
Kanjira Mute
55 G 2 43 G 1 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2
Kanjira Bend up
56 G# 244G# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4
Kanjira Bend down
57 A 2 45 A 1 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3
Dholak Open
58 A# 246A# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Open 2
Dholak Mute
59 B 2 47 B 1 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4
Dholak Slap
60 C 3 48 C 2 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5
Dhol Open
61 C# 349C# 2 Analog Cymbal
Hand Cymbal L Dhol Mute
62 D 3 50 D 2 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6
Dhol Slap
63 D# 351D# 2
Hand Cymbal Short L
Dhol Slide
64 E 3 52 E 2
Mridangam Normal
65 F 3 53 F 2
Mridangam Open
66 F# 354F# 2
Mridangam Mute
67 G 3 55 G 2
Mridangam Slap
68 G# 356G# 2 Analog Cowbell
Mridangam Rim
69 A 3 57 A 2
Hand Cymbal H Chimta Open
70 A# 358A# 2
Chimta Normal
71 B 3 59 B 2
Hand Cymbal Short H
Chimta Ring
72 C 4 60 C 3
Dholki Open
73 C# 461C# 3
Dholki Mute
74 D 4 62 D 3 Analog Conga H
Dholki Slap
75 D# 463D# 3 Analog Conga M
Dholki Slide
76 E 4 64 E 3 Analog Conga L
Dholki Rim
77 F 4 65 F 3
Khol Open
78 F# 466F# 3
Khol Slide
79 G 4 67 G 3
Dagu Mute Khol Mute
80 G# 468G# 3
Zhongcha Mute Manjira Open
81 A 4 69 A 3
Dagu Heavy Manjira Close
82 A# 470A# 3 Analog Maracas
Zhongcha Open Jhanji Open
83 B 4 71 B 3
Paigu Middle Jhanji Close
84 C 5 72 C 4
Paigu Low Mondira Open
85 C# 573C# 4
Xiaocha Mute Mondira Close
86 D 5 74 D 4
Bangu Mridang Open
87 D# 575D# 4 Analog Claves
Xiaocha Open Mridang Mute
88 E 5 76 E 4
Bangzi Mridang Rim
89 F 5 77 F 4
Muyu Low Mridang Slide
90 F# 578F# 4 Scratch Push
Zhongluo Mute Khomokh Normal
91 G 5 79 G 4 Scratch Pull
Muyu Mid-Low Khomokh Mute
92 G# 580G# 4
Zhongluo Open Khomokh Mltatk
93 A 5 81 A 4
Muyu Middle Madal-A2
94 A# 582A# 4
Xiaoluo Open Madal-A#2
95 B 5 83 B 4
Triangle Mute Madal-B2
96 C 6 84 C 5
Triangle Open Madal-C3
97 C# 685C# 5 Madal-C#3
98 D 6 86 D 5 Madal-D3
99 D# 687D# 5 Madal-D#3
100 E 6 88 E 5 Madal-E3
101 F 6 89 F 5 Madal-F3
102 F# 690F# 5 Madal-F#3
103 G 6 91 G 5 Madal-G3
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
63
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
209 210 211 212 213 214
126/000/115 126/000/037 126/000/041 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113
Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit
Zarb Back mf
Zarb Tom f
Indian Hand Clap Zarb Eshareh
Dafli Open Zarb Whipping
Dafli Slap Tombak Tom f
Dafli Rim Neghareh Tom f
Duff Open Tombak Back f
Duff Slap Neghareh Back f
Duff Rim Tombak Snap f
Hatheli Long Neghareh Pelang f Conga H Tip
Hatheli Short Tombak Trill Conga H Heel
Baya ge Khaligi Clap 1 Conga H Open
Drum Loop
Baya ke Arabic Zalgouta Open Conga H Mute
Baya ghe Khaligi Clap 2 Conga H Slap Open
Baya ka Arabic Zalgouta Close Conga H Slap
Tabla na Arabic Hand Clap Conga H Slap Mute
Tabla tin Tabel Tak 1 Conga L Tip
Tablabaya dha Sagat 1 Conga L Heel
Dhol 1 Open Tabel Dom Conga L Open
Dhol 1 Slap Sagat 2 Conga L Mute
Dhol 1 Mute Tabel Tak 2 Conga L Slap Open
Dhol 1 Open Slap Sagat 3 Conga L Slap
Dhol 1 Roll Riq Tik 3 Conga L Slide
Dandia Short Riq Tik 2 Bongo H Open 1 finger Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat
Dandia Long Riq Tik Hard 1 Bongo H Open 3 finger Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps
Chutki Riq Tik 1 Bongo H Rim Door Slam Door Squeak
Chipri Riq Tik Hard 2 Bongo H Tip String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam
Khanjira Open Riq Tik Hard 3 Bongo H Heel Scratch Split Applause
Khanjira Slap Riq Tish Bongo H Slap Wind Chime Camera
Khanjira Mute Riq Snouj 2 Bongo L Open 1 finger Telephone Ring 2 Horn
Khanjira Bendup Riq Roll Bongo L Open 3 finger Hiccup
Khanjira Benddown Riq Snouj 1 Bongo L Rim Cuckoo Clock
Dholak 1 Open Riq Sak Bongo L Tip Stream
Dholak 1 Mute Riq Snouj 3 Bongo L Heel Frog
Dholak 1 Slap Riq Snouj 4 Bongo L Slap Rooster
Dhol 2 Open Riq Tak 1 Timbale L Open Dog
Dhol 2 Slap Riq Brass 1 Cat
Dhol 2 Rim Riq Tak 2 Owl
Mridangam na Riq Brass 2 Horse Gallop
Mridangam din Riq Dom Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh
Mridangam ki Katem Tak Doff Paila L Car Tires Squeal Cow
Mridangam ta Katem Dom Timbale H Open Car Passing Lion
Mridangam Chapu Katem Sak 1 Car Crash Scratch
Mridangam Lo Closed Katem Tak 1 Siren Yo!
Mridangam Lo Open Katem Sak 2 Train Go!
Chimta Normal Katem Tak 2 Jet Plane Get up!
Chimta Ring Daholla Sak 2 Paila H Starship Whoow!
Dholki Hi Open Daholla Sak 1 Cowbell Top Burst
Huuaah!
Dholki Hi Mute Daholla Tak 1 Roller Coaster
Dholki Lo Open Daholla Dom Submarine
Dholki Hi Slap Daholla Tak 2
Dholki Lo Slide Tablah Prok Guiro Short
Khol Open Tablah Dom 2 Guiro Long
Khol slide Tablah Roll of Edge
Khol Mute Tablah Tak Finger 4
Manjira Open Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tambourine Shower Laugh
Manjira Close Tablah Tak Finger 3 Thunder Scream
Jhanji Open Tablah Tak Trill 2 Wind Punch
Jhanji Close Tablah Tak Finger 2 Stream Heartbeat
Mondira Open Tablah Tak Finger 1 Maracas Bubble Footsteps
Uh!+Hit
Mondira Close Tablah Tik 2 Shaker Feed
Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Tablah Tik 4 Cabasa
Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Tablah Tik 3
Indian Bhangra Scat 3 Tablah Tik 1
indian Bhangra Scat 4 Tablah Tak 3
Khomokh Normal Tablah Tak 1
Khomokh Mute Tablah Tak 4
Khomokh mltatk Tablah Tak 2
Thavil Open Tablah Sak 2
Thavil Slap Tablah Tremolo
Thavil Mute Tablah Sak 1
Khartaal Tablah Dom 1 Dog Machine Gun
Dholak 2 Open Horse Laser Gun Applause 1
Dholak 2 Slide Bird Tweet 2 Explosion Applause 2
Dholak 2 Rim 1 Firework Applause 3
Dholak 2 Rim 2 Applause 4
Dholak 2 Ring
Dholak 2 Slap
Maou
* Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list.
64
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Song List
• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book,
complete the user registration at the following website.
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Song No. Song Name
Top Picks
001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)
002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)
003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)
Learn to Play
004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)
007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)
008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)
009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)
010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)
013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)
014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)
015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)
016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)
017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)
018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)
019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)
Favorite
020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)
021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)
022 Aura Lee (Traditional)
023 London Bridge (Traditional)
024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)
025 Nedelka (Traditional)
026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)
027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)
028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)
029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)
030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)
031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)
032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)
033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)
034 Greensleeves (Traditional)
035 Kalinka (Traditional)
036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)
037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)
038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)
039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)
040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)
041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)
042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)
043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)
044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)
045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)
046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)
047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)
048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)
049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)
050
Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvo
ř
ák)
Favorite with Style
051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)
052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)
053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)
054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)
055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)
056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)
057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)
058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)
059 Red River Valley (Traditional)
060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)
061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)
062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)
063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)
064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)
065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)
066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)
067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)
068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)
069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)
070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)
Instrument Master
071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)
072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)
074
Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)
076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)
077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)
078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)
079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)
Piano Repertoire
080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)
081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)
082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)
083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)
084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)
085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)
086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)
087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)
088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)
089
Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)
090
Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)
091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)
092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)
093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)
094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)
095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)
096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)
097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)
098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)
099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)
100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)
101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)
Song No. Special Appendix
Chord Study
103–114 ChdStd01–ChdStd12
Chord Progression
115–154 Maj1234–min1736
Song No. Song Name
65
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1BritPopRock
2 8BeatModern
3 Cool8Beat
4 StadiumRock
5 70sRock
6 HardRock1
7 60sGuitarPop
8 8BeatAdria
9 60s8Beat
10 8Beat
11 OffBeat
12 Folkrock
13 60sRock
14 HardRock2
15 RockShuffle
16 8BeatRock
16BEAT
17 16Beat
18 PopShuffle
19 GuitarPop
20 16BeatUptempo
21 KoolShuffle
22 HipHopLight
BALLAD
23 70sGlamPiano
24 PianoBallad
25 LoveSong
26 6/8ModernEP
27 6/8SlowRock
28 OrganBallad
29 PopBallad
30 16BeatBallad
DANCE
31 ClubBeat
32 Electronica
33 FunkyHouse
34 RetroClub
35 USHipHop
36 MellowHipHop
37 Chillout
38 EuroTrance
39 Ibiza
40 SwingHouse
41 Clubdance
42 ClubLatin
43 Garage1
44 Garage2
45 TechnoParty
46 UKPop
47 HipHopGroove
48 HipShuffle
49 HipHopPop
DISCO
50 ModernDisco
51 70sDisco
52 LatinDisco
53 SaturdayNight
54 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
55 BigBandFast
56 BigBandBallad
57 AcousticJazz
58 AcidJazz
59 JazzClub
60 Swing1
61 Swing2
62 Five/Four
63 Dixieland
64 Ragtime
R&B
65 BluesRock
66 Soul
67 DetroitPop
68 60sRock&Roll
69 6/8Soul
70 CrocoTwist
71 Rock&Roll
72 ComboBoogie
73 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
74 CountryPop
75 CountrySwing
76 Country2/4
77 Bluegrass
LATIN
78 BrazilianSamba
79 BossaNova
80 Forro
81 Sertanejo1
82 Sertanejo2
83 Baião
84 Joropo
85 Parranda
86 Reggaeton
87 Tijuana
88 PasoDuranguense
89 CumbiaGrupera
90 BaladaBanda
91 MexicanMambo
92 Mambo
93 Salsa
94 Beguine
95 Reggae
WORLD
96 ScottishReel
97 4/4Standart
98 Rumba2/4
99 Saeidy
100 WehdaSaghira
101 IranianElec
102 Emarati
103 AfricanGospelReggae
104 HighLife
105 IndianPop
106 Bhangra
107 Bhajan
108 BollyMix
109 Tamil
110 Kerala
111 GoanPop
112 Rajasthan
Style No. Style Name
113 Dandiya
114 Q aw wa li
115 FolkHills
116 ModernDangdut
117 Keroncong
118 XiQingLuoGu
119 YiZuMinGe
120 JingJuJieZou
BALLROOM
121 VienneseWaltz
122 EnglishWaltz
123 Slowfox
124 Foxtrot
125 Quickstep
126 Tango
127 Pasodoble
128 Samba
129 ChaChaCha
130 Rumba
131 Jive
TRADITIONAL
132 USMarch
133 6/8March
134 GermanMarch
135 PolkaPop
136 OberPolka
137 Tarantella
138 Showtune
139 ChristmasSwing
140 ChristmasWaltz
WALTZ
141 SwingWaltz
142 JazzWaltz
143 ValsMexicano
144 CountryWaltz
145 OberkrainerWalzer
146 Musette
CHILDREN
147 Learning2/4
148 Learning4/4
149 Learning6/8
PIANIST
150 Stride
151 PianoSwing
152 PianoBoogie
153 Arpeggio
154 Habanera
155 SlowRock
156 8BeatPianoBallad
157 6/8PianoMarch
158 PianoWaltz
Style No. Style Name
66
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
POP
1AlvFever
2DayPdise
3 GoMyWay
4 HowDeep!
5 HurryLuv
6 Imagine
7JustCall
8 SultanSw
9WhitePle
10 YesterBd
ROCK
11 JumpRock
12 PickUpPc
13 RdRiverR
14 SatsfyRk
15 Sheriff
16 SmokeWtr
17 TwistAgn
18 VenusPop
DANCE
19 2 of Us
20 B Leave
21 Back St
22 Crockett
23 FunkyTwn
24 KillSoft
25 Nine PM
26 SingBack
27 StrandD
BALLAD
28 AdelineB
29 CatMemry
30 ElvGhett
31 Feeling
32 Mn Rivr
33 OnMyMnd
34 OverRbow
35 ReleseMe
36 SavingLv
37 SmokyEye
38 WhisprBd
R & B
39 AmazingG
40 BoogiePf
41 Clock Rk
42 CU later
43 HappyDay
44 RisingSn
45 ShookUp
46 TeddyBer
SWING & JAZZ
47 ChooChoo
48 HighMoon
49 InMood
50 MistyBld
51 MoonLit
52 New York
53 SaintMch
54 ShearJz
55 TstHoney
56 USPatrol
EASY LISTENING
57 Close2U
58 Entrtain
59 LuvStory
60 MyPrince
61 PupetStr
62 Raindrop
63 R'ticGtr
64 SingRain
65 SmallWld
66 SpkSoft
67 StrangeN
68 TimeGoes
69 WhteXmas
70 WishStar
71 WondrWld
LATIN
72 BambaLa
73 BeHappy!
74 CopaLola
75 DayNight
76 Ipanema
77 MuchoBgn
78 Sunshine
79 TicoSmb
80 WaveBosa
COUNTRY
81 BoxerGtr
82 CntryRds
83 Jambala
84 TopWorld
85 YlwRose
BALLROOM
86 BrazilBr
87 CheryApl
88 DanubeWv
89 TangoAc
90 Tea4Two
TRADITIONAL
91 CampRace
MDB No. MDB Name
92 CielPari
93 GrndClok
94 JinglBel
95 MickMrch
96 Showbiz
97 StarMrch
98 WashPost
99 SilentNt
100 YankDood
MDB No. MDB Name
67
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
No. Harmony Type Description
001 Duet
If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while
playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three
notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that
includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.
002 Trio
003 Block
004 Country
005 Octave
006 Trill 1/4 note
If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.
007 Trill 1/6 note
008 Trill 1/8 note
009 Trill 1/12 note
010 Trill 1/16 note
011 Trill 1/24 note
012 Trill 1/32 note
013 Tremolo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.
(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)
014 Tremolo 1/6 note
015 Tremolo 1/8 note
016 Tremolo 1/12 note
017 Tremolo 1/16 note
018 Tremolo 1/24 note
019 Tremolo 1/32 note
020 Echo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.
(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)
021 Echo 1/6 note
022 Echo 1/8 note
023 Echo 1/12 note
024 Echo 1/16 note
025 Echo 1/24 note
026 Echo 1/32 note
Arpeggio Type List
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
027 UpOct
028 DownOct
029 UpDwnOct
030 SynArp1
031 SynArp2
032 SynArp3
033 SynArp4
034 SyncEcho
035 PulsLine
036 StepLine
037 Random
038 Down&Up
039 SuperArp
040 AcidLine
041 TekEcho
042 VelGruv
043 Planet
044 Trance1
045 Trance2
046 Trance3
047 ChordAlt
048 SynChrd1
049 SynChrd2
050 Syncopa
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
051 Hybrid1
052 Hybrid2
053 Hybrid3
054 Hybrid4
055 Hybrid5
056 PfArp1
057 PfArp2
058 PfArp3
059 PfArp4
060 PfClub1
061 PfClub2
062 PfBallad
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
Effect Type List
68
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
063 PfChd8th
064 EPArp
065 PfShufle
066 PfRock
067 Clavi1
068 Clavi2
069 RocknPf
070 70RockPf
071 SlowflPf
072 SoulPf
073 ChordUp
074 ChdDance
075 LatinRck
076 Salsa1
077 Salsa2
078 Reggae1
079 Reggae2
080 Reggae3
081 6/8R&B
082 Gospel
083 BalladEP
084 Strum1
085 Strum2
086 Strum3
087 Strum4
088 Pickin1
089 Pickin2
090 Funky
091 GtrChrd1
092 GtrChrd2
093 GtrChrd3
094 GtrArp
095 FngrPck1
096 FngrPck2
097 CleanGtr
098 Slowfl
099 Samba1
100 Samba2
101 Spanish1
102 Spanish2
103 Harp1
104 Harp2
105 FngrBas1
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
106 FngrBas2
107 FngrBas3
108 CoolFunk
109 SlapBass
110 AcidBas1
111 Ac i d Bas 2
112 FunkyB a s
113 CmbJazB1
114 CmbJazB2
115 CmbJazB3
116 NewR&BBs
117 HipHopBs
118 S moothBs
119 D re a mBas
120 TranceBs
121 LatinBas
122 Strings1
123 Strings2
124 Strings3
125 Strings4
126 StrngDwn
127 StrngUp
128 OrcheStr
129 Jupiter
130 Pizz1
131 Pizz2
132 BrasSec1
133 BrasSec2
134 BrasSec3
135 FunkBras
136 SoulReed
137 DiscoLd
138 SmoothPd
139 PercArp
140 Ethnic
141 Cresendo
142 DiscoCP
143 Perc1
144 Perc2
145 R&B
146 Funk1
147 Funk2
148 Funk3
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
149 Soul
150 ClscHip
151 Smooth
152 NewGospl
153 CmbJazz1
154 CmbJazz2
155 Bebop
156 JazzHop
157 FolkRock
158 Unpluggd
159 HipHop
160 Trance
161 Dream
162 2 Step
163 ClubHs1
164 ClubHs2
165 EuroTek
166 House
167 Ibiza1
168 Ibiza2
169 Ibiza3
170 Garage
171 Samba
172 African
173 Latin
174 China
175 Indian
176 Arabic
Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–03 Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
04–05 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.
06 Off No effect.
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
69
Specifications
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product,
this manual may not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the
manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha
dealer.
Size/Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H) 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”)
Weight 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.)
Keyboard
Number of Keys 61
Touch Response Yes
Display
Type LCD display
Backlight Yes
Language English
Voices
Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling
Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32
Preset Number of Voices
196 panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices
Compatibility GM/XGlite
Effects
Types
Reverb 9 types
Chorus 5 types
Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types
Master EQ 6 types
Harmony 26 types
Arpeggio 150 types
Functions
Melody Suppressor (for AUX IN)
Ye s
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Panel Sustain Yes
Accompaniment
Styles
Preset
Number of Preset Styles 158
Fingering Multi finger
Style Control
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
External Styles Yes
Other Features
Music Database 100
One Touch Setting Yes
Recording/Playback
(MIDI data only;
audio not sup-
ported.)
Preset Number of Preset Songs 154 (including Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 40)
Recording
Number of Songs 5
Number of Tracks 2
Data Capacity Approx. 10,000 notes
Compatible Data
Format
Playback SMF Formats 0 & 1
Recording Original File Format
Function
Lesson/Guide
[KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING],
[PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY],[CHORD
PROGRESSION]
Registration Number of Buttons 9
Overall
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 11–280
Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12
Tuning 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)
Duo Yes
Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes
Memory/
Connectivity
Memory Internal Memory Approx. 1.7MB
Connectivity
USB TO HOST Yes
DC IN DC IN 12V
Headphones/Output [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1
Sustain Pedal [SUSTAIN] x 1
AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Yes
Amplifiers/Speakers
Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W
Speakers 12cm x 2
Power Supply
Power Supply
Adaptor
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
Batteries
Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable
batteries
Power Consumption 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor)
Auto Power Off Function Yes
Accessories
Included Accessories
•Music rest
• Owner’s Manual
• AC adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
• Online Member Product Registration
* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please
check with your Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
• AC adaptor:
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
• Keyboard stand: L-2C
• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30
• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5
• USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1)
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
70
Index
A
A-B Repeat ................................29
AC Adaptor
................................12
ACMP
........................................22
Arpeggio
....................................19
Arpeggio Velocity
................20, 41
Auto Accompaniment
................22
AUTO FILL
................................24
Auto Power Off
....................14, 42
AUX IN
...................................... 11
AUX IN Volume
.........................40
B
Backup ......................................43
Backup Clear
.............................43
Backup Parameter
.....................43
battery
.......................................12
Battery Type
..............................42
Beat
...........................................15
BGM
..........................................28
C
Chord ........................................15
Chord Dictionary
.......................26
Chord Progression
.....................36
Chord Study
..............................35
Chord Type
................................25
Chorus
.......................................18
Chorus Type
........................41, 68
computer
...................................43
Computer-related Operations
......5
D
Demo .........................................27
Demo Cancel
............................42
Demo Group
..............................42
Demo Play Mode
.......................42
Display
......................................15
Drum Kit List
..............................61
Dual Voice
........................... 17, 41
Duo
............................................21
E
Effect ...................................18, 41
Effect Type List
..........................67
ENDING
....................................24
EQ Setting
.................................14
EQ type
.....................................14
External Clock
...........................42
F
Fast Forward .............................28
Fast Reverse
.............................28
Flash Clear
................................43
Footswitch
.................................13
Function
.....................................40
Function List
..............................40
G
GM System Level 1 ..................... 5
Grade
........................................33
Grand Piano
.............................. 16
H
Harmony ................................... 19
Harmony Type
........................... 41
Harmony Volume
................ 20, 41
Headphone
............................... 13
I
Initial Send ................................42
Initialization
...............................43
INTRO
....................................... 24
iPad
........................................... 43
iPhone
.......................................43
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
.5
i-UX1
.........................................43
K
Keyboard Display ...................... 15
Keys To Success
....................... 31
L
Lesson ......................................31
Listening
.............................. 31, 33
Local Control
.............................42
M
MAIN .........................................24
Main Voice
.......................... 16, 41
Master EQ Type
........................41
Measure
.................................... 15
Melody Suppressor
................... 30
Metronome
................................ 16
Metronome Volume
............. 16, 42
MIDI Basics
................................. 5
MIDI Reference
...........................5
Music Database
........................ 23
Music Database List
..................66
Music Rest
............................ 5, 13
Musicsoft Downloader
...............23
N
Notation .................................... 15
O
One Touch Setting .................... 16
P
Panel Sustain ...................... 18, 41
Part
...........................................29
Passing Status
..........................32
Pause
........................................ 28
PC Mode
............................. 41, 42
Pedal Function
.......................... 41
Phrase Repeat
.................... 31, 34
Playback
...................................28
Power Requirements
................. 12
R
Random .................................... 28
Recording Data Capacity
.......... 37
Registration Memory
................ 39
Reverb
...................................... 18
Reverb Level
............................. 41
Reverb Type
........................ 41, 68
rhythm
....................................... 22
rit.
.............................................. 24
S
Section ...................................... 24
Song
......................................... 27
Song Book
............................ 5, 31
Song Book Sample
................... 46
Song Category
.......................... 27
Song List
................................... 64
Song Volume
...................... 27, 40
Specifications
........................... 69
Split
........................................... 17
Split Point
.......................17, 22, 40
Split Voice
............................17, 41
Style
......................................... 22
STYLE FILE
................................ 5
Style List
................................... 65
Style Register
........................... 40
Style Volume
....................... 22, 40
SUSTAIN
.................................. 13
Sustain
...........................18, 21, 41
Synchro Start
............................ 22
T
Tap ............................................ 24
Temp o
..................................16, 24
Time Signature
....................16, 42
Timing
................................. 31, 33
Touch Response
......................... 5
Touch Sensitivity
..................14, 40
Tra ck
......................................... 37
Transpose
................................. 40
Troubleshooting
........................ 44
Tuning
....................................... 40
U
Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 18
USB
............................................ 5
USB TO HOST
..........................11
User Song
................................. 37
V
Voice ......................................... 16
Voice List
.................................. 56
W
Waiting ................................ 31, 33
Wide Type
................................. 41
X
XGlite .......................................... 5
Y
Yo u r Te m p o ............................... 42
71
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Plug
Fiche
Enchufe
Stecker
Plugue
Вилка
Slide the plug as indicated
Faites glisser la fiche en suivant les indications
Deslice el enchufe tal como se indica.
Stecker wie angegeben einschieben
Deslize o plugue conforme indicado
Надвиньте вилку, как показано на рисунке
* The shape of the plug differs depending on locale.
* La forme de la fiche varie selon le pays.
* La forma del enchufe varía según la región.
* Die Form des Steckers variiert je nach Land.
* O formato do plugue varia de acordo com a localidade.
* В разных странах штепсельные вилки отличаются по форме.
For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug
Do not remove the plug from the power
adaptor. If the plug is removed accidentally,
slide the plug into place without touching the
metallic parts, and then push the plug in completely
until it clicks.
Adaptateur secteur avec fiche amovible
Ne retirez pas la fiche de l'adaptateur secteur.
Si la fiche est retirée accidentellement,
remettez-la en place sans toucher les parties
métalliques et faites-la glisser complètement jusqu'à
ce qu'un déclic se produise.
Para el adaptador de alimentación con un
enchufe extraíble
No retire el enchufe del adaptador de
alimentación. Si el enchufe se retira por
accidente, vuelva a colocarlo en su lugar sin
tocar los componentes metálicos y, a continuación,
enchúfelo del todo hasta que se oiga un clic.
Für den Netzadapter mit abziehbarem Stecker
Ziehen Sie den Stecker nicht vom Netzadapter
ab. Sollte der Stecker unabsichtlich entfernt
werden, schieben Sie den Stecker wieder
hinein, ohne die Metallteile zu berühren, und drücken
Sie ihn dann vollständig hinein, bis er einrastet.
Para o adaptador de alimentação com plugue
removível
Não remova o plugue do adaptador de
alimentação. Se o plugue for removido
acidentalmente, encaixe-o sem tocar nas
partes metálicas e, em seguida, empurre-o para
dentro completamente até ouvir um clique.
Для адаптера питания со съемной вилкой
Не снимайте вилку с адаптера питания.
Если вилка была снята случайно,
надвиньте вилку на место, не прикасаясь к
металлическим частям, и наденьте ее полностью,
до щелчка.
• Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor.
Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.
• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug.
To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be
careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and
plug.
• Assurez-vous que la fiche reste fixée à l'adaptateur secteur.
L'utilisation de la fiche seule risque de provoquer des
électrocutions ou des incendies.
• Ne touchez jamais la partie métallique lorsque vous
insérez la fiche. Afin d'éviter les risques d'électrocution,
courts-circuits ou incidents, veillez également à ce que
l'adaptateur secteur et la fiche ne soient pas encrassés par
la poussière.
• Asegúrese de mantener el enchufe conectado al
adaptador de CA. Si se utiliza el enchufe solo, se puede
producir una descarga eléctrica o un incendio.
• No toque nunca la sección metálica al conectar el
enchufe. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, cortocircuitos o
daños, fíjese en que no haya polvo entre el adaptador de
CA y el enchufe.
EN
WARNING
FR
AVERTISSEMENT
ES
ADVERTENCIA
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Stecker am Netzadapter
anschlossen bleibt. Die Verwendung des Steckers alleine
kann zu elektrischen Schlägen oder einem Brand führen.
• Berühren Sie bitte niemals den Metallabschnitt, wenn Sie
den Stecker befestigen. Um elektrische Schläge,
Kurzschlüsse oder Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, achten
Sie bitte darauf, dass sich zwischen Netzadapter und
Stecker kein Staub angesammelt hat.
• Sempre mantenha o plugue conectado ao adaptador CA.
O uso do plugue sozinho pode causar choque elétrico ou
incêndio.
• Nunca toque na parte metálica ao conectar o plugue. Para
evitar choque elétrico, curto-circuito ou danos, também
tome cuidado para que não haja poeira entre o adaptador
CA e o plugue.
• Убедитесь, что вилка соединена с блоком питания.
Использование вилки без блока питания может
привести к поражению электрическим током или
пожару.
• Не прикасайтесь к металлическим частям при
подключении вилки. Во избежание поражения
электрическим током, короткого замыкания или
повреждения оборудования убедитесь, что между
блоком питания и ви
лкой нет пыли.
DE
WARNUNG
PT
ADVERTÊNCIAS
RU
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
72
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with
your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service
or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
(weee_battery_eu_en_01)
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også
selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb
Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien
oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei
einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben
werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
73
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If
Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or
removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay
the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)
damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to
follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the
carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been
altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)
deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)
damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/
noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of
alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original
Owner and is not transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted
Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website
at www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of
the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to
assume for it any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America.
74
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
75
PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”,
Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez,
03900, Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4º andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 São Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 54-11-4119-7000
VENEZUELA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,
Sucursal Venezuela
C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4
Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta
Caracas Venezuela
Tel: 58-212-943-1877
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, U.K.
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 044-387-8080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office)
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/
ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Poland Office
ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: 022-500-2925
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Sofia, Bulgaria
Tel: 02-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida
MSD06
Tel: 02133-2144
NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/
LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: +34-91-639-88-88
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial
Scandinavia
J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: +46 31 89 34 00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial
Denmark
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 78 00
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik,
Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi
Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza
Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul
Tel: +90-212-999-8010
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
SOUTH AFRICA
Global Music Instruments
World of Yamaha
19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton,
South Africa
Tel: +27-11-259-7700
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 400-051-7700
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector
47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited
Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: 65-6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd.
3F, No.6, Section 2 Nan-Jing East Road, Taipei,
Taiwan R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
VIETNAM
Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited
15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach
Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,
Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
Tel: +84-8-3818-1122
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
http://asia.yamaha.com
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
http://asia.yamaha.com
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI8
HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
ZN22380
Manual Development Department
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation
Published 01/2015 PO##*.*-**A0
Printed in China
Yamaha Global Site
http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Transcripción de documentos
DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN For PSR-E353 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E353 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and PSR-E353 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 3 For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do. Computer-related Operations Contains instructions about computer-related functions. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E353” (for example) to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC adaptor*1 • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GMcompatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Style File Format (SFF) The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment knowhow into a single unified format. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature gives you maximum expressive control over the level of the Voices. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 5 Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Contents About the Manuals................................................ 5 Included Accessories............................................ 5 Formats and functions .......................................... 5 Setting Up 10 Setting Up 12 Power Requirements .......................................... 12 Using the music rest ........................................... 13 Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or External Audio Equipment ............................. 13 Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack.. 13 Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13 Auto Power Off Function .................................... 14 Setting the Volume ............................................. 14 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14 Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard . 14 15 Display Items ...................................................... 15 Basic Operations ................................................ 15 Reference Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16 Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16 Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16 Using the Metronome ......................................... 16 Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17 Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 18 Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 18 Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19 Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) 21 Playing Styles 22 Using the Music Database.................................. 23 Registering a Style File....................................... 23 Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24 Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24 Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 26 Playing Songs 27 Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27 Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27 BGM Playback.................................................... 28 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 28 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28 A-B Repeat ......................................................... 29 Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29 6 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) ......................................30 Using the Song Lesson Feature Panel Controls and Terminals Display Items and Basic Operations Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 30 31 Downloading the Song Book............................... 31 Keys To Success ................................................31 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................33 Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting ..34 Phrase Repeat .................................................... 34 Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) 35 Hear and experience a sound of a single chord..35 Hear and experience basic chord progressions..35 Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song 36 Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function ....................................36 Recording Your Performance 37 Track Structure of a Song ...................................37 Quick Recording..................................................37 Recording to a Specified Track ...........................38 Clearing a User Song..........................................38 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 39 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ..........................................................39 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..........................................................39 The Functions 40 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 43 Connecting to a computer ...................................43 Connecting an iPhone/iPad.................................43 Backup and Initialization 43 Backup Parameters.............................................43 Initialization .........................................................43 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 44 Song Book Sample ........................................ 46 Voice List ........................................................ 56 Drum Kit List .................................................. 61 Song List......................................................... 64 Style List ......................................................... 65 Music Database List ...................................... 66 Effect Type List .............................................. 67 Specifications................................................. 69 Index................................................................ 70 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-E353 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) DMI-5 1/3 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 7 • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - Use the specified battery type (page 69) only. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. DMI-5 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections Location 8 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. 2/3 • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Handling caution Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below. About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases. Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 43) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto an external device such as a computer (page 43). DMI-5 About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 3/3 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel q w e r i t y o !0 u !1 Song List (page 64) !2 !3 Style List (page 65) !4 !5 Display (page 15) !6 Voice List (page 56) Music Database List (page 66) @9 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 @0 !7 @6 !8 @7 !9 @8 @1 10 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual @5 @2 @3 @4 C6 Panel Controls and Terminals q w e r t y [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..................... page 13 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 13 [DEMO] button......................................page 28 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 40 [METRONOME] button......................... page 16 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 24 Rear Panel #0 In the Lesson mode u PART [L] button ..............................................page 33 [R] button ..............................................page 33 #1 #3 #2 #4 In the Recording mode u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37 [REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37 i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 31 o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 34 !0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button ...............................................................page 33 In the Song mode !1 [A-B REPEAT] button ...........................page 29 !2 [REW] button ........................................page 28 !3 [FF] button ............................................page 28 !4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 [SUSTAIN] jack ..................................... page 13 [USB TO HOST] terminal*.................... page 43 [AUX IN] jack ........................................ page 30 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack ..................... page 13 DC IN jack ............................................. page 12 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 5) on the website. When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. In the Style mode !1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 22 !2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 24 !3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 24 !4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 [START/STOP] button .................. pages 22, 27 [REC] button .........................................page 37 [SONG] button ......................................page 27 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 16 [STYLE] button .....................................page 22 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ........... page 15 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ............... page 16 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button .......... page 18 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 30 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 39 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17 [HARMONY] button .............................. page 19 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit .... page 16 Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.” The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Installing the batteries Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Using an AC adaptor 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlight display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power supply jack). 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION 3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. DC IN jack (page 11) 2 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that AC adaptor 3 AC outlet NOTE • After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse order to disconnect the AC adaptor. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Using Batteries This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/ Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickelmetal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. 12 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 42). When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-recharged ones. NOTE • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Setting Up Setting the battery type After installing new batteries and turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function number 046 (page 42). NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. NOTICE • Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly. Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or External Audio Equipment • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. • The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and style (automatic accompaniment; page 22). Turning the Power On/Off 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.” 1/4” stereo phone plug A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the [PHONES/ OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn off the power for all components. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Auto Power Off Function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes. To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “AutoOff” (Function 045; page 42) appears, then use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes) Default value: 30 (minutes) Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second to call up “024 MasterEQ” (Function 024; page 41). “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears. To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be disabled by selecting Off in Function number 045 (page 42). MasterEQ 024 Hold for longer than a second. 1 Speaker 024 NOTE Current Master EQ type • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 43. NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. Setting the Volume When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound. 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard You can specify the Touch Response (how the sound responds to your playing strength). This can be set via Function number 007 (page 40). CAUTION • Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. 14 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Display Items and Basic Operations Display Items Song/Voice/Style Lesson Indication These indicate the operating condition of the instrument. On/Off status This area indicates the Lesson related status is on. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. ... Touch Response (page 14) ... Ultra-Wide Stereo (page 18) ... Auto Accompaniment (page 22) ... Split (page 17) Keys To Success (page 31) Phrase Repeat (page 34) Chord Progression (page 36) Notation Indicates the Passing Status (page 32) of the Keys To Success lesson. Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function (page 26) is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. ... Arpeggio (page 19) ... Duo (page 21) NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. 001 GrandPno 003 Chord Song Track status Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or specified via Song playback. Measure or Function Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 40) is in use, this indicates the Function number. ... Dual (page 17) ... Harmony (page 19) Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or target Track of Song recording (page 29, 38). Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data 003 027 Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. Basic Operations Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values. Number buttons [-] and [+] buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harpsichord. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3], or simply press [3]. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice number 001 GrandPno Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Using the Metronome 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired Voice. Refer to the Voice List on page 56. 096 Flute The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. 2 Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Select 096 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. To change the tempo: Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Preset Voice Types 16 090 Tempo 001–196 Instrument Voices (including sound effects). 197–214 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 61. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. 215–234 Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by simply playing the keyboard (page 19). To set the Time Signature: 235–573 XGlite Voices (page 58) 000 One Touch Setting The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice when you select a Style or Song (excepting the Song inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Current Tempo value Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up “TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 42), then use the Number buttons. To set the Metronome Volume: This can be set via Function number 038 (page 42). Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. 001 GrandPno Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. Appears when Dual Voice is on 001 GrandPno Appears when Split Voice is on Two Voices will sound at the same time. 2 Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. 036 (C1) To select a different Dual Voice: Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 41), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice and Dual Voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” (Function 006; page 40) which can be changed from the default F#2 key. 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. To select a different Split Voice: Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice” (Function 016; page 41), then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 17 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo) You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect. 1 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to turn it on. 001 GrandPno Appears when UltraWide Stereo is on. The sound will expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. 2 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again to turn it off. To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type: Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to call up “Wide” (Function 025; page 41), then use the Number buttons. 18 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Applying Effects to the Sound This instrument can apply various Effects as listed below to the instrument’s sound. Reverb Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 020 (page 41). You can also set the Reverb depth via Function number 021 (page 41). Chorus Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 022 (page 41). Panel Sustain By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function number 023 (page 41), you can add a fixed, automatic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold separately; page 13). NOTE • Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to which sustain is not applied. Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony or Arpeggio 2 You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main Voice. By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply harmony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth— and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be used creatively in music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio function. 001 Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second so that “Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 41) appears on the display. After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the current type appears. Harm/Arp 028 Hold for longer than a second. 001 Duet 028 Current type 3 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired type. When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67; to specify an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list on page 67. GrandPno NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176, select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main Voice. Appears when the Harmony is turned on. 143–173: Select a drum Voice. 174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc” (Voice No.207). 175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.208) or “Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.209). 176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.210). or 106 Analogon Appears when the Arpeggio is turned on. 4 Press a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio. When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the played sound of the Main Voice. Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on, the most suitable one will be selected for the current Main Voice. If you want to select a specific type, select it by the operation steps 2 and 3 below. NOTE • The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main Voice. • When selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234, the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on. • When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005, the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. 5 To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off, press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 19 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices How the effect is applied to the sound for the various Types Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch (Hold) You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Harmony Type 001 to 005 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22). 1 • Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill) Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031) item appears on the display. After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the current setting is shown. Hold down two keys. Pdl Func • Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo) 031 Keep holding down the keys. 1 • Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo) Sustain 031 Play the keys. 2 • Arpeggio Type 027 to 176 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” When Split is off: 2 Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice and the Dual Voice. 3 NOTE • Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/ Dual Voices simultaneously. • Selecting a Voice number between 225 and 234 as the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split automatically. To adjust the Harmony Volume: This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (page 41). To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity: This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (page 41). 20 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Arp Hold 031 When Split is on: Arpeggio function applies only to the split Voice. Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select “Arp Hold.” Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio playback using the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one person on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other person watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side. 1 To start this instrument in the Duo mode, simultaneously hold down the [L] button and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. How sounds are output in the Duo mode Notes played in the left Voice section sound from the left side speaker while notes played in the right Voice section sound from the right side speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This output setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut” setting (Function 027; page 41). “DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point and the keyboard is divided into two sections: one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice. NOTE • In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteristics of the strereo sound may differ from those in the normal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate” (page 41). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit features a different stereo pan position. Using sustain in the Duo mode on Equivalent to C3 Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by using one of the following methods in the Duo mode like the usual mode. DuoMode Split Point: 066 (F#3) Equivalent to C3 • Press the foot switch (page 13) connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Set “Sustain” (Function 023; page 41) to on. NOTE Left Voice • Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left Voice section and the right Voice section. Right Voice NOTE • While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is maintained even when the power is turned off. • The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice). • In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed from F# 3. 2 Style Playback in the Duo mode Although full Style features (accompaniment) cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part of a Style can be played back while playing the left/right Voices normally. One person should play the left Voice section of the keyboard while the other plays the right Voice section. Recording in the Duo mode Selecting a Voice Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in “Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16. NOTE • When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162 to 188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice. • Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode. The right Voice section and the left Voice section are recorded on the same track. 3 To exit from the Duo mode, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the power, and turn the power back on again normally. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the Style List (page 65). 025 LoveSong Style Number Flashes when sync start is on. 002 8BtModrn 4 Style Name Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. For information about chords, refer to “Chord Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 26). This icon appears when the [STYLE] button is pressed. 2 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. Split Point 025 LoveSong This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 24. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) To play back the rhythm part only 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Auto Accompaniment range The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can be changed from the default of F#2 via Function number 006 (page 40). If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a melody performance using the entire keyboard range. NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (150–158) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page. Adjusting the Style Volume To adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This can be set via Function number 001 (page 40). 22 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Using the Music Database If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. 001 2 In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a computer) as Style number 159 which will be used in the same way as the Preset Styles. 1 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Music Database. Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a computer to this instrument by using Musicsoft Downloader. For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5) on the website. You can transfer two or more Styles to this instrument although only a single Style can be registered to Style number 159. AlvFever This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. The category name of Music Database List is provided on the front panel, or in the Music Database List (page 66). 3 Registering a Style File 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “StyleReg” (Function 008; page 40) appears. StyleReg Play the keyboard as described in Steps 4–5 on page 22. 008 After about two seconds, a registerable Style file name will appear in the display. 3 If necessary, select the desired Style by using the [+] or [-] button. 4 Press the [0] button. 5 Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles Style Variations—Sections 7 Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. These instructions cover a typical example for using the Sections. After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. FILL A≥B 8 1–3 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22. 4 MAIN A Current Section 5 Changing the Tempo Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 25. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 24 The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A 6 ENDING Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Song. Using the Tap function While a Song or Style is playing back, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song or Style. Playing Styles Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details. indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary Dict. 001 The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 2-2. Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. Dict. Chord name (root and type) This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. • The range to the right of “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Keyboard playing range Chord Type range As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. 26 Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. Root range Far right of the keyboard 2 Dict. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(# 11), b 5, M7b 5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b 5, 7b 5, sus2 3 Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE .” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson. Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing the keyboard according to the LCD display indications. Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions. Songs (User Songs) you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 5). Listening to a Demo Song Song number Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo Songs in sequence. 004 Elise 1 Song name When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button. Appears after the [Song] button is pressed. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected Song. To change the tempo: Selecting and Playing Back a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the Number buttons to select the desired Song. Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24. Adjusting the Song Volume To adjust the volume balance between Song playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This can be set via Function number 002 (page 40). Refer to the Song List (page 64). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs BGM Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. 1 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” (Function 042; page 42) is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Use the [+] or [-] button to select a playback group. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (155–159) Download All songs transferred from a computer (160–) NOTE Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO] button. • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. 3 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. Random Song Playback When the Demo Group (above) is set to something other than “Demo,” the playback order via the [DEMO] button can be changed between numerical order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Function 043; page 42) is called up, then select “Normal” or “Random.” Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other desired Voice. 1 2 3 Select a Song. Select the desired Voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces the Song’s original melody Voice. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 28 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs A-B Repeat Turning Each Part On/Off You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A B As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), Songs other than Song numbers 115 to 154 consist of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individually by pressing the corresponding button, L or R. Repeat playback of this section 1 Start playback of the Song (page 27). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. 020 FrereJac 010 Lit: Track contains data 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off during playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the keyboard. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the Parts. NOTE • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player, with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you play the keyboard along with playback of your music player. 1 Turn off the power for both the external audio device and this instrument. 2 Connect the audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at one side for connecting to this instrument and the plug matching the output jack of the external audio device at the other side. Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) When the sound of an external audio device is output through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You can use the function to cancel the melody part then practice it via the keyboard. 1 Play back the connected external audio device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. Stereo-mini plug on Audio device (Portable audio player, etc.) MelodySP Appears when Melody Suppressor is on NOTE 3 Turn on the external audio device, then this instrument. 4 Play back the connected external audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 5 Adjust the volume balance between the external audio device and this instrument. • If an external audio device is not properly connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be turned on or shown in the display, even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button. When the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled (or lowered) as expected 1 If possible, adjust the playback level of the external audio device first, to achieve optimum balance. NOTE Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 41) while the Melody Suppressor function is turned on. • You can adjust the level of the input from the external audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function number 003 (page 40) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons. 6 Play the keyboard along with the sound of the audio device. 7 After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. CAUTION L63 – C – R63 (Left – Center – Right) C 026 Hold for longer than a second. 2 • Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. 30 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Adjust the pan position of the sound to be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+], [-] buttons. NOTE • Depending on the particular music content, the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. NOTICE • After connecting, first turn on the power to the external audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. SupprPan 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. Using the Song Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R” or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If you have already passed several Steps, the next Step number appears on the display. Downloading the Song Book To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Appears when Keys to Success is on Keys To Success Step01 In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the entire Song. 1 Prepare the Song Book. Download the Song Book from the above website, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the end of this manual. The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are pre-programmed) will differ depending on the Song. For details, refer to the Song Book. Current Step number Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, playback of the current Step starts. NOTE • All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103– 154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs. 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select a Song for your lesson. Step01 Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corresponding page of the Song Book. 001 NOTE 004 3 • For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may be slower than original. Elise 1 Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to engage this lesson. 5 Practice the phrase in the current Step. Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the notes shown on the display, press the notes. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 31 Using the Song Lesson Feature 6 Confirm the evaluation in the current Step. When the current Step reaches the end, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 Confirming the Passing Status You can confirm the passing status of each Song simply by selecting a Song and each Step. When Step is selected Step01 Excellen 001 Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. ✩ : Passed No information: Not yet passed A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did not pass this Step and you should try the same Step again, which begins automatically. A score of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. 7 passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on. In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all the way through the Song. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE • Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using the [+]/[-] buttons. 8 ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. Clearing the Passing Status You can clear existing passing status entries for the entire Song or a specific Step of the Song. To clear the passing status entries of all Steps: Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds, with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. To clear the passing status entry for a specific Step: Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success, select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. NOTE • This operation cannot be executed during playback. 32 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting 3 Lesson 1—Listening In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. Pressing this button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTENING 2: TIMING 3: WAITING off 1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. Lesson 2—Timing In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound. NOTE • During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. • The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting; page 16) during the Lesson. 4 NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF via the Function number 041 (page 42). 1 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels. Excellent! ~~~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~~~ Good ~~~~ OK ~~ Press the [SONG] button then select a Song for your lesson. NOTE • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 43), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. 2 After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Press either or both the [R] and [L] buttons to select the part you want to practice. Left-hand lesson NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the selected Voice. NOTE Right-hand lesson Left • The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during lessons. Right 5 Both-hands lesson BothHand Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • Songs 115 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening, Timing and Waiting Lessons. NOTE • In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the current Song does not contain a left-hand part. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Song Lesson Feature Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 31) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 33). 1 Enable the Keys to Success lesson. 2 Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select the desired lesson. Practicing only a single Phrase During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to practice. The corresponding Phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off the L or R part (page 29), then practice the phrase which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 31. The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is not available. 3 To return to only the Keys to Success mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select “off.” 4 To exit from the Lesson mode, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. P03 REPEAT Phrase number Even during repeat playback, you can select any other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again. Using Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing or Waiting With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or three times to start and use Lesson playback with Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode. NOTE • In this status, the evaluation function is not available. Practicing two or more Phrases Phrase Repeat You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-programmed in the Preset Songs (excepting the Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 5). Phrase mark By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again. NOTE • You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons. • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Repeat playback of this section 34 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by playing back Song numbers 103 to 114 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers 103 to 109 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am, Bm; respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the chords one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 110 to 114 consist of several chords strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord progressions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by playing back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music notation and key/chord indications shown in the display. Hear and experience a sound of a single chord 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 103 to 109 in the “CHORD STUDY” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. 103 ChdStd01 003 Hear and experience basic chord progressions 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 110 to 114 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. Listen to the basic chord progression, and play along with the Song repeatedly until you can smoothly perform and play along with the chord changes. NOTE • You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. NOTICE • When playing the keyboard while playing back a Song, you should turn off any parts you don’t intend to have played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the maximum number of simultaneous notes. NOTE • You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typical chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence— from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you to practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords. 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27. 2 Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. To change the key of a Song: When Chord Progression is on, press one of the keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to change the tonic pitch of the Song. After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and the number of the keys to be pressed are shown. Root range Db Eb F# Ab Bb The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C Far right of the keyboard C D E F G A B CPg Appears when Chord Progression is on. C 1Note The number of the keys to press: 1 For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song of C major, the key changes to D major. NOTE • The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback. NOTE • The initial key setting is C major or A minor. 3 Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the number of the keys to be played. Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number of the keys to press is increased from just one root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three notes (3Notes) and four notes (All). CPg C 2Notes NOTE • The number of the keys to press can also be set by using the number buttons [1]–[4]. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 5 Play the keyboard looking at the notes shown on the display. CPg C 1Note 001 NOTE • When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5, the notes will not sound. 6 36 Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again to turn the Chord Progression function off. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual The number of the keys to be played Only one root note (1Note) Press only the root note of the chord. Two notes (2Notes) Press the 3rd interval of a chord along with the root note, and understand the difference between major chords and minor chords. Three notes (3Notes) Press the 5th interval of a chord along with the root note and the 3rd. Four notes (All) Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very often, chords are played with just three notes; however, another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes added. Keep in mind that depending on the chord, there may be no 4th note. Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function You can practice the playing the chords in combination with “Waiting” (page 33) of the Lesson function by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once. NOTE • Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on the display (excluding the range of C5–B5, which are used to change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the chords, the playback will progress. Recording Your Performance You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. Track Structure of a Song User Song Number You can record your performance to the following two tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously. rEC User 1 001 Track 1: Your melody performance is recorded to this track. Flashes Track 2: Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord changes and Section changes), is recorded to this track. To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC] button again to stop flashing on the display. NOTICE • If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1 (Song Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In this case, since you will record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you save your important data to a computer (see page 43). Recording Data Capacity: NOTE A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. Quick Recording • ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you can select another Style in this status by using the [STYLE] and Number buttons. 3 The operation is convenient for recording a new Song without having to specify a track. 1 Press the [REC] button to enable the Record mode. If ACMP is turned on, you can independently record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing the Section (page 24). Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Make the desired settings such as Voice and Style settings. 36 If you want to record only the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback as well as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 Play the keyboard to start recording. 48 60 72 Auto Accompaniment range 4 On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then waiting until playback ends. NOTICE • After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal memory and result in a loss of data. 5 To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Performance Recording to a Specified Track 1 Make the desired settings, such as those of Voice or Style. If you want to record the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 Clearing a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button then select the desired User Song by using the Number buttons. 2 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to engage the Record mode. A confirmation message appears. If you want to record Style playback, make sure to select the Track 2. If you want to record melody performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as desired. The illustration below is the example when selecting Track 2. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 3 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message appears again. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 1 YES Sure? 001 To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for example and Track 1 contains already recorded data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will determine whether you listen to a previously recorded Track or not while recording a new Track. 4 Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in “Quick Recording.” Limitations while Recording • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons are not available, or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded: ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. 38 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A “Writing!” message appears while the track is being cleared. Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9. Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice and Style. 2 Press and hold down the [REGIST MEMORY] button for longer than a second. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button. “LoadNo.?” appears on the display. LoadNo.? “MemNo.?” appears on the display. MemNo.? 2 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display. Hold for longer than a second. 3 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, an “Overwr?” message appears in the display. To overwrite, press the [+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO]. 01 REGIST 1 The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume, Tempo, Main A/B Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions Effect settings: Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/ off and all settings of the related Functions Other settings: Panel Sustain on/off, Transpose, Voice output * When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style settings can be recorded or called up. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 39 The Functions The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until the desired item appears. 2 Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. To decrease the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button does not change the Function number. Current value Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off Function name Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On StyleVol 100 NOTE 001 • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE]. Function number After a few seconds, the Function name may be replaced with the setting value depending on the selected Function. NOTE • The Function number does not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value appears instead. Function List Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 27) 100 Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 30) Determines the volume of the Style. (page 22) AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. 006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 007 Touch Response TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed) 2 (Medium) Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Fixed) is selected, Touch Response is off and the volume level does not change at all regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard. Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 23). 003 Overall 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. Style file 008 40 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Main Voice (page 16) 009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing along with a Song or a Style. 010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects a Dual Voice. Dual Voice (page 17) 012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–573 * 013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice (page 17) 016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Split Voice. 017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 68) Effects 020 Reverb Type Reverb 1–3 (Hall 1–3) 4–5 (Room 1–2) 6–7 (Stage 1–2) 8–9 (Plate 1–2) 10 (Off) 021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 68) 022 Chorus Type Chorus 1 (Chorus1) 2 (Chorus2) 3 (Chorus3) 4 (Flanger1) 5 (Flanger2) 6 (off) 023 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker) 2 (Headphone) 3 (Boost) 4 (Piano) 5 (Bright) 6 (Mild) 025 Wide Type Wide 1 (Wide1) 2 (Wide2) 3 (Wide3) 026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 027 Voice Output VoiceOut 1 (Normal) 2 (Separate) OFF 1 (Speaker) 2 (Wide2) C 2 (Separate) Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off. Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. (page 14) Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 18) Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio device to be canceled or lowered (page 30). When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21) is on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the performance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker. Harmony (page 19) 028 Harmony/Arpeggio Type Harm/Arp 001–026 (Harmony) 027–176 (Arpeggio) * Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is selected. 029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the Harmony types 1–5 is selected. Arpeggio (page 19) 030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo 1 (Original) 2 (Thru) ** If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume regardless of your playing strength. 031 Pedal Function Pdl Func 1 (Sustain) 2 (Arp Hold) 3 (Hold+Sus) * Refer to the page 20. PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF Computer (page 42) 032 PC mode Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 42). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 41 The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions MIDI 033 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 034 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 035 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/ YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. Metronome (page 16) 036 Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. 037 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 038 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 31) 039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are playing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed you are playing at. Demo (page 27) 042 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) 2 (Preset) 3 (User) 4 (Download) 1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group. 043 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode. 044 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (minutes) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery Auto Power Off (page 14) 045 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff Battery (page 13) 046 Battery Type Battery * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio. PC Mode (FUNCTION 032) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes * An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use. ** Cannot be set independently. NOTE • MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs. 42 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad Connecting to a computer This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/ Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer connected via a USB cable. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computerrelated Operations” (page 5) on the website. USB terminal Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 • Style: (.sty) • Backup File: PSR-E353.BUP * * Backup parameters (as described below) other than “Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. NOTE USB terminal • This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256 Song files. Connecting an iPhone/iPad computer instrument USB cable NOTE • If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to register it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on page 23. By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument, you can take advantage of various functions. To make connections, prepare the i-UX1 (sold separately), then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” (page 5) on the website. Backup and Initialization Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Backup parameters • • • • • User Songs (page 37) Style Number 159 (page 23) Registration Memory (page 39) Passing status of Song and Step (page 32) FUNCTION Settings: (page 40) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Battery Type In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data registered to Style numbers 159 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. NOTICE Initialization You can initialize your original data via the following two methods. • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 43 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with the application on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 033.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06– 26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 034). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. • Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. • The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 40 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 40 Function 006). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. • • • • The volume is too soft. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The sound quality is poor. ones, or use the included AC adaptor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. 44 Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 14). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (Function 045; page 42). When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Memo PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 45 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 46 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note Whole note rest Dotted half note Dotted half note rest Half note Half note rest Dotted quarter note Dotted quarter note rest Quarter note Time signature Notes and Rests Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note Eighth note rest Sixteenth note Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 47 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency. From here... 48 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 ...to here Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 49 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 50 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 51 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first phrase. 52 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 53 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The first note has a staccato dot. Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 54 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!” Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands. Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the finishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 55 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 56 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 Strings 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass 0 113 63 80s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funky Brass 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead Voice List Voice No. 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Stardust 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 112 106 Banjo 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 98 106 Oud 0 96 106 Rabab 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 0 114 105 Tanpura 0 96 112 Pungi 0 117 74 Bansuri 0 0 105 Sitar 1 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 0 112 Shehnai 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 116 117 Tabla 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 118 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 113 108 Gu Zheng 0 40 47 Yang Qin 0 120 111 Morin Khuur 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin DUAL* – – – Octave Piano – – – Piano & Strings – – – Piano Pad – – – Octave Harpsichord – – – Tiny Electric Piano – – – Electric Piano Pad – – – Full Organ – – – Octave Jazz Guitar – – – Octave Strings – – – Orchestra Section – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings Voice No. 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) – – – Strings Session – – – Brass Tutti – – – Orchestra Tutti – – – Octave French Horns – – – Octave Harp – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani – – – Octave Choir – – – Jazz Brass Section – – – Jazz Section – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble – – – Ballroom Brass – – – Flute & Clarinet – – – Trumpet & Trombone – – – Fat Synth Brass – – – Octave Lead – – – Super 5th Lead SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit ARPEGGIO** – – – Concerto – – – Latin Rock – – – Brass Section – – – Piano Ballad – – – Synth Sequence – – – Guitarist – – – Pickin' – – – Spanish – – – Funky Clavi – – – Harpeggio – – – Finger Bass Left – – – Combo Jazz Left – – – Paul's Bass Left – – – Trance Bass Left – – – Acid Bass Left – – – Piano Ballad Left – – – Salsa Piano Left – – – Piano Arpeggio Left – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left – – – Strum Left * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. ** Selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234 will turn on Arpeggio. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 57 Voice List XGlite Voice List Voice No. 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 58 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 1 0 64 11 Music Box 2 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ 0 0 20 Church Organ 1 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 23 Harmonica 1 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp Voice List Voice No. 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 1 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 1 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 1 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 1 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square Voice No. 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 59 Voice List Voice No. 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 60 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 103 Echoes 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 572 573 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “197: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 197 127/000/001 198 127/000/002 199 127/000/009 200 127/000/017 201 127/000/025 202 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare H Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Rock H Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 Snare Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog L Bass Drum Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Room Tom 1 Snare Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 Snare Rock H Electronic Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 4 Electronic Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 61 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 62 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 203 127/000/113 204 127/000/033 205 127/000/041 206 127/000/049 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit 207 126/000/128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Analog Snare Snappy Snare Jazz H Light Analog Bass Drum Dance 1 Analog Snare Open Rim Analog Bass Drum Dance 2 Analog Bass Drum Dance 3 Bass Drum Jazz Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Q Snare Jazz L Analog Snare + Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Snare Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Slap L Bass Drum L Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Brush Slap Marching Snare M Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Snare H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cymbal L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cymbal Short L Analog Cowbell Hand Cymbal H Hand Cymbal Short H Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open 208 126/000/040 Indian Kit 1 Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list. 209 126/000/115 210 126/000/037 211 126/000/041 212 126/000/001 213 126/000/002 214 126/000/113 Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit Indian Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Indian Bhangra Scat 3 indian Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Drum Loop Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 63 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Song No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song No. 103–114 115–154 Song Name Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) Special Appendix Chord Study ChdStd01–ChdStd12 Chord Progression Maj1234–min1736 • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ 64 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Style List Style No. Style Name 8BEAT Style No. Style Name Style No. Style Name 56 BigBandBallad 113 Dandiya 1 BritPopRock 57 AcousticJazz 114 Qawwali 2 8BeatModern 58 AcidJazz 115 FolkHills 3 Cool8Beat 59 JazzClub 116 ModernDangdut 4 StadiumRock 60 Swing1 117 Keroncong 5 70sRock 61 Swing2 118 XiQingLuoGu 6 HardRock1 62 Five/Four 119 YiZuMinGe 7 60sGuitarPop 63 Dixieland 120 JingJuJieZou 8 8BeatAdria 64 Ragtime 9 60s8Beat 121 VienneseWaltz 10 8Beat 65 BluesRock 122 EnglishWaltz 11 OffBeat 66 Soul 123 Slowfox 12 Folkrock 67 DetroitPop 124 Foxtrot 13 60sRock 68 60sRock&Roll 125 Quickstep 14 HardRock2 69 6/8Soul 126 Tango 15 RockShuffle 70 CrocoTwist 127 Pasodoble 16 8BeatRock 71 Rock&Roll 128 Samba 16BEAT 72 ComboBoogie 129 ChaChaCha 73 6/8Blues 130 Rumba 17 16Beat R&B BALLROOM 131 Jive 18 PopShuffle 19 GuitarPop 74 CountryPop 20 16BeatUptempo 75 CountrySwing 132 USMarch 21 KoolShuffle 76 Country2/4 133 6/8March 22 HipHopLight 77 Bluegrass 134 GermanMarch LATIN 135 PolkaPop COUNTRY BALLAD TRADITIONAL 23 70sGlamPiano 78 BrazilianSamba 136 OberPolka 24 PianoBallad 79 BossaNova 137 Tarantella 25 LoveSong 80 Forro 138 Showtune 26 6/8ModernEP 81 Sertanejo1 139 ChristmasSwing 27 6/8SlowRock 82 Sertanejo2 140 ChristmasWaltz 28 OrganBallad 83 Baião 29 PopBallad 84 Joropo 141 SwingWaltz 30 16BeatBallad 85 Parranda 142 JazzWaltz DANCE 86 Reggaeton 143 ValsMexicano ClubBeat 87 Tijuana 144 CountryWaltz 32 Electronica 88 PasoDuranguense 145 OberkrainerWalzer 33 FunkyHouse 89 CumbiaGrupera 146 Musette 34 RetroClub 90 BaladaBanda 35 USHipHop 91 MexicanMambo 147 Learning2/4 36 MellowHipHop 92 Mambo 148 Learning4/4 37 Chillout 93 Salsa 149 Learning6/8 38 EuroTrance 94 Beguine 39 Ibiza 95 Reggae 150 Stride 40 SwingHouse 151 PianoSwing 41 Clubdance 96 ScottishReel 152 PianoBoogie 42 ClubLatin 97 4/4Standart 153 Arpeggio 43 Garage1 98 Rumba2/4 154 Habanera 44 Garage2 99 Saeidy 155 SlowRock 45 TechnoParty 100 WehdaSaghira 156 8BeatPianoBallad 46 UKPop 101 IranianElec 157 6/8PianoMarch 47 HipHopGroove 102 Emarati 158 PianoWaltz 48 HipShuffle 103 AfricanGospelReggae 49 HipHopPop 104 HighLife DISCO 105 IndianPop 50 ModernDisco 106 Bhangra 51 70sDisco 107 Bhajan 52 LatinDisco 108 BollyMix 53 SaturdayNight 109 Tamil 54 DiscoHands 110 Kerala SWING&JAZZ 111 GoanPop BigBandFast 112 Rajasthan 31 55 WORLD WALTZ CHILDREN PIANIST PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 65 Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP MDB No. MDB Name 92 CielPari GrndClok 1 AlvFever 47 ChooChoo 93 2 DayPdise 48 HighMoon 94 JinglBel 3 GoMyWay 49 InMood 95 MickMrch 4 HowDeep! 50 MistyBld 96 Showbiz 5 HurryLuv 51 MoonLit 97 StarMrch 6 Imagine 52 New York 98 WashPost 7 JustCall 53 SaintMch 99 SilentNt 8 SultanSw 54 ShearJz 100 YankDood 9 WhitePle 55 TstHoney 10 YesterBd 56 ROCK USPatrol EASY LISTENING 11 JumpRock 57 Close2U 12 PickUpPc 58 Entrtain 13 RdRiverR 59 LuvStory 14 SatsfyRk 60 MyPrince 15 Sheriff 61 PupetStr 16 SmokeWtr 62 Raindrop 17 TwistAgn 63 R'ticGtr 18 VenusPop 64 SingRain DANCE 65 SmallWld 19 2 of Us 66 SpkSoft 20 B Leave 67 StrangeN 21 Back St 68 TimeGoes 22 Crockett 69 WhteXmas 23 FunkyTwn 70 WishStar 24 KillSoft 71 WondrWld 25 Nine PM 26 SingBack 72 BambaLa 27 StrandD 73 BeHappy! BALLAD 66 MDB Name SWING & JAZZ LATIN 74 CopaLola 75 DayNight Ipanema 28 AdelineB 29 CatMemry 76 30 ElvGhett 77 MuchoBgn 31 Feeling 78 Sunshine 32 Mn Rivr 79 TicoSmb 33 OnMyMnd 80 WaveBosa 34 OverRbow 35 ReleseMe 81 BoxerGtr 36 SavingLv 82 CntryRds 37 SmokyEye 83 Jambala 38 WhisprBd 84 TopWorld R&B 85 YlwRose BrazilBr COUNTRY BALLROOM 39 AmazingG 40 BoogiePf 86 41 Clock Rk 87 CheryApl 42 CU later 88 DanubeWv 43 HappyDay 89 TangoAc 44 RisingSn 90 45 ShookUp 46 TeddyBer PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Tea4Two TRADITIONAL 91 CampRace Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 001 Harmony Type Description Duet 002 Trio 003 Block 004 Country 005 Octave 006 Trill 1/4 note 007 Trill 1/6 note 008 Trill 1/8 note 009 Trill 1/12 note 010 Trill 1/16 note 011 Trill 1/24 note 012 Trill 1/32 note 013 Tremolo 1/4 note 014 Tremolo 1/6 note 015 Tremolo 1/8 note 016 Tremolo 1/12 note 017 Tremolo 1/16 note 018 Tremolo 1/24 note 019 Tremolo 1/32 note 020 Echo 1/4 note 021 Echo 1/6 note 022 Echo 1/8 note 023 Echo 1/12 note 024 Echo 1/16 note 025 Echo 1/24 note 026 Echo 1/32 note If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Arpeggio Type List Arpeggio No. 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 Arpeggio Name UpOct DownOct UpDwnOct SynArp1 SynArp2 SynArp3 SynArp4 SyncEcho PulsLine StepLine Random Down&Up Arpeggio No. 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Arpeggio Name SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Planet Trance1 Trance2 Trance3 ChordAlt SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Syncopa Arpeggio No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 Arpeggio Name Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 Hybrid4 Hybrid5 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PfArp4 PfClub1 PfClub2 PfBallad PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 67 Effect Type List Arpeggio No. 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 Arpeggio Name PfChd8th EPArp PfShufle PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 RocknPf 70RockPf SlowflPf SoulPf ChordUp ChdDance LatinRck Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BalladEP Strum1 Strum2 Strum3 Strum4 Pickin1 Pickin2 Funky GtrChrd1 GtrChrd2 GtrChrd3 GtrArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 CleanGtr Slowfl Samba1 Samba2 Spanish1 Spanish2 Harp1 Harp2 FngrBas1 Arpeggio No. 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Arpeggio Name FngrBas2 FngrBas3 CoolFunk SlapBass AcidBas1 AcidBas2 FunkyBas CmbJazB1 CmbJazB2 CmbJazB3 NewR&BBs HipHopBs SmoothBs DreamBas TranceBs LatinBas Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Strings4 StrngDwn StrngUp OrcheStr Jupiter Pizz1 Pizz2 BrasSec1 BrasSec2 BrasSec3 FunkBras SoulReed DiscoLd SmoothPd PercArp Ethnic Cresendo DiscoCP Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 Funk3 Arpeggio No. 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 Chorus Types No. 01–03 04–05 06 68 Chorus Type Description Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Arpeggio Name Soul ClscHip Smooth NewGospl CmbJazz1 CmbJazz2 Bebop JazzHop FolkRock Unpluggd HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza1 Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage Samba African Latin China Indian Arabic Specifications Size/Weight Keyboard Display Voices Effects Accompaniment Styles Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Type Backlight Language Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Reverb Chorus Ultra-Wide Stereo Types Master EQ Harmony Arpeggio Melody Suppressor (for AUX IN) Dual Functions Split Panel Sustain Number of Preset Styles Fingering Preset Style Control External Styles Other Features Preset Recording/Playback (MIDI data only; audio not supported.) Recording Compatible Data Format Music Database One Touch Setting Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Lesson/Guide Registration Function Overall Miscellaneous Memory Memory/ Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Connectivity Number of Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Duo Portable Grand Button Internal Memory USB TO HOST DC IN Headphones/Output Sustain Pedal AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Amplifiers Speakers Adaptor Power Supply Power Supply Batteries Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories Accessories Optional Accessories 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”) 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.) 61 Yes LCD display Yes English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 196 panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices GM/XGlite 9 types 5 types 3 types 6 types 26 types 150 types Yes Yes Yes Yes 158 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes 100 Yes 154 (including Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 40) 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes SMF Formats 0 & 1 Original File Format [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING], [PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY],[CHORD PROGRESSION] 9 Yes 11–280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) Yes Yes Approx. 1.7MB Yes DC IN 12V [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1 [SUSTAIN] x 1 Yes 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm x 2 Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor) Yes • Music rest • Owner’s Manual • AC adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) • Online Member Product Registration * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Keyboard stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1) * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product, this manual may not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 69 Index A G R A-B Repeat ................................29 AC Adaptor ................................12 ACMP ........................................22 Arpeggio ....................................19 Arpeggio Velocity ................20, 41 Auto Accompaniment ................22 AUTO FILL ................................24 Auto Power Off .................... 14, 42 AUX IN ...................................... 11 AUX IN Volume .........................40 GM System Level 1 ..................... 5 Grade ........................................ 33 Grand Piano .............................. 16 Random .................................... 28 Recording Data Capacity .......... 37 Registration Memory ................ 39 Reverb ...................................... 18 Reverb Level ............................. 41 Reverb Type ........................ 41, 68 rhythm ....................................... 22 rit. .............................................. 24 B Backup ......................................43 Backup Clear .............................43 Backup Parameter .....................43 battery .......................................12 Battery Type ..............................42 Beat ...........................................15 BGM ..........................................28 C Chord ........................................15 Chord Dictionary .......................26 Chord Progression .....................36 Chord Study ..............................35 Chord Type ................................25 Chorus .......................................18 Chorus Type ........................41, 68 computer ...................................43 Computer-related Operations ......5 D Demo .........................................27 Demo Cancel ............................42 Demo Group ..............................42 Demo Play Mode .......................42 Display ......................................15 Drum Kit List ..............................61 Dual Voice ........................... 17, 41 Duo ............................................21 E Effect ................................... 18, 41 Effect Type List ..........................67 ENDING ....................................24 EQ Setting .................................14 EQ type .....................................14 External Clock ...........................42 H Harmony ................................... 19 Harmony Type ........................... 41 Harmony Volume ................ 20, 41 Headphone ............................... 13 I Initial Send ................................ 42 Initialization ............................... 43 INTRO ....................................... 24 iPad ........................................... 43 iPhone ....................................... 43 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual . 5 i-UX1 ......................................... 43 K Keyboard Display ...................... 15 Keys To Success ....................... 31 L Lesson ...................................... 31 Listening .............................. 31, 33 Local Control ............................. 42 M MAIN ......................................... 24 Main Voice .......................... 16, 41 Master EQ Type ........................ 41 Measure .................................... 15 Melody Suppressor ................... 30 Metronome ................................ 16 Metronome Volume ............. 16, 42 MIDI Basics ................................. 5 MIDI Reference ........................... 5 Music Database ........................ 23 Music Database List .................. 66 Music Rest ............................ 5, 13 Musicsoft Downloader ............... 23 N Notation .................................... 15 O One Touch Setting .................... 16 P F Fast Forward .............................28 Fast Reverse .............................28 Flash Clear ................................43 Footswitch .................................13 Function .....................................40 Function List ..............................40 Panel Sustain ...................... 18, 41 Part ........................................... 29 Passing Status .......................... 32 Pause ........................................ 28 PC Mode ............................. 41, 42 Pedal Function .......................... 41 Phrase Repeat .................... 31, 34 Playback ................................... 28 Power Requirements ................. 12 S Section ...................................... 24 Song ......................................... 27 Song Book ............................ 5, 31 Song Book Sample ................... 46 Song Category .......................... 27 Song List ................................... 64 Song Volume ...................... 27, 40 Specifications ........................... 69 Split ........................................... 17 Split Point .......................17, 22, 40 Split Voice ............................17, 41 Style ......................................... 22 STYLE FILE ................................ 5 Style List ................................... 65 Style Register ........................... 40 Style Volume ....................... 22, 40 SUSTAIN .................................. 13 Sustain ...........................18, 21, 41 Synchro Start ............................ 22 T Tap ............................................ 24 Tempo ..................................16, 24 Time Signature ....................16, 42 Timing ................................. 31, 33 Touch Response ......................... 5 Touch Sensitivity ..................14, 40 Track ......................................... 37 Transpose ................................. 40 Troubleshooting ........................ 44 Tuning ....................................... 40 U Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 18 USB ............................................ 5 USB TO HOST ..........................11 User Song ................................. 37 V Voice ......................................... 16 Voice List .................................. 56 W Waiting ................................ 31, 33 Wide Type ................................. 41 X XGlite .......................................... 5 Y Your Tempo ............................... 42 70 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug Für den Netzadapter mit abziehbarem Stecker Do not remove the plug from the power EN adaptor. If the plug is removed accidentally, slide the plug into place without touching the metallic parts, and then push the plug in completely until it clicks. Ziehen Sie den Stecker nicht vom Netzadapter DE ab. Sollte der Stecker unabsichtlich entfernt werden, schieben Sie den Stecker wieder hinein, ohne die Metallteile zu berühren, und drücken Sie ihn dann vollständig hinein, bis er einrastet. WARNING • Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. WARNUNG • Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Stecker am Netzadapter anschlossen bleibt. Die Verwendung des Steckers alleine kann zu elektrischen Schlägen oder einem Brand führen. • Berühren Sie bitte niemals den Metallabschnitt, wenn Sie den Stecker befestigen. Um elektrische Schläge, Kurzschlüsse oder Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, achten Sie bitte darauf, dass sich zwischen Netzadapter und Stecker kein Staub angesammelt hat. Adaptateur secteur avec fiche amovible Ne retirez pas la fiche de l'adaptateur secteur. FR Si la fiche est retirée accidentellement, remettez-la en place sans toucher les parties métalliques et faites-la glisser complètement jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic se produise. AVERTISSEMENT • Assurez-vous que la fiche reste fixée à l'adaptateur secteur. L'utilisation de la fiche seule risque de provoquer des électrocutions ou des incendies. • Ne touchez jamais la partie métallique lorsque vous insérez la fiche. Afin d'éviter les risques d'électrocution, courts-circuits ou incidents, veillez également à ce que l'adaptateur secteur et la fiche ne soient pas encrassés par la poussière. Para o adaptador de alimentação com plugue removível Não remova o plugue do adaptador de PT alimentação. Se o plugue for removido acidentalmente, encaixe-o sem tocar nas partes metálicas e, em seguida, empurre-o para dentro completamente até ouvir um clique. ADVERTÊNCIAS • Sempre mantenha o plugue conectado ao adaptador CA. O uso do plugue sozinho pode causar choque elétrico ou incêndio. • Nunca toque na parte metálica ao conectar o plugue. Para evitar choque elétrico, curto-circuito ou danos, também tome cuidado para que não haja poeira entre o adaptador CA e o plugue. Para el adaptador de alimentación con un enchufe extraíble Для адаптера питания со съемной вилкой No retire el enchufe del adaptador de ES alimentación. Si el enchufe se retira por accidente, vuelva a colocarlo en su lugar sin tocar los componentes metálicos y, a continuación, enchúfelo del todo hasta que se oiga un clic. Не снимайте вилку с адаптера питания. RU Если вилка была снята случайно, надвиньте вилку на место, не прикасаясь к металлическим частям, и наденьте ее полностью, до щелчка. ADVERTENCIA • Asegúrese de mantener el enchufe conectado al adaptador de CA. Si se utiliza el enchufe solo, se puede producir una descarga eléctrica o un incendio. • No toque nunca la sección metálica al conectar el enchufe. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, cortocircuitos o daños, fíjese en que no haya polvo entre el adaptador de CA y el enchufe. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ • Убедитесь, что вилка соединена с блоком питания. Использование вилки без блока питания может привести к поражению электрическим током или пожару. • Не прикасайтесь к металлическим частям при подключении вилки. Во избежание поражения электрическим током, короткого замыкания или повреждения оборудования убедитесь, что между блоком питания и вилкой нет пыли. Plug Fiche Enchufe Stecker Plugue Вилка * The shape of the plug differs depending on locale. * La forme de la fiche varie selon le pays. * La forma del enchufe varía según la región. * Die Form des Steckers variiert je nach Land. * O formato do plugue varia de acordo com a localidade. * В разных странах штепсельные вилки отличаются по форме. Slide the plug as indicated Faites glisser la fiche en suivant les indications Deslice el enchufe tal como se indica. Stecker wie angegeben einschieben Deslize o plugue conforme indicado Надвиньте вилку, как показано на рисунке PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 71 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (battery) (standby) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) 72 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 73 74 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”, Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez, 03900, Mexico, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4º andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 São Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 54-11-4119-7000 VENEZUELA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Venezuela C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4 Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta Caracas Venezuela Tel: 58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 DMI8 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46 31 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 78 00 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul Tel: +90-212-999-8010 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 65-6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd. 3F, No.6, Section 2 Nan-Jing East Road, Taipei, Taiwan R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com SOUTH AFRICA Global Music Instruments World of Yamaha 19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton, South Africa Tel: +27-11-259-7700 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 75 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 01/2015 PO##*.*-**A0 Printed in China ZN22380-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Pianos digitales
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard de handleiding
- português: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha PortaTone PSR-I425 Manual de usuario
-
Yamaha EZ300 61 Full-Size Lighted Touch Sensitive Keyboard El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha PSR-I500 Ficha de datos
-
-
-